International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 NON-PERFORMING ASSETS MANAGEMENT IN PUBLIC SECTOR BANKS

Dr. Laxmi Gupta Saraswati Mahila Mahavidyalaya Palwal Distt. Palwal, Haryana, India – 121102 Email: [email protected]

ABSTRACT: Non-Performing Assets can be defined as Assets which do not directly contribute to the bank’s profitability. If an asset ceases to yield income for the bank, it ceases to be the performing asset and has to be treated as a Non-Performing Asset. The three letters strike terror in banking sector and business circle today. All the public sector banks are facing the problem of Non-Performing Assets (NPA) which requires recovery measures to increase the profitability as well as good image for these banks. In the present paper the results of a study on Non-Performing Assets (NPA) Management in Public Sector Banks (PSBs) of District Palwal have been presented. Keywords: NPA, Bank, Asset, SARFAESI, Recovery INTRODUCTION: reduce the profitability of a bank, weaken its At present there are 28 public sector banks (PSBs) financial health and erode its solving. The banks consisting of the State Bank of India (SBI), its 7 and financial instructions have to take the subsidiaries and 19 Nationalized Banks and the initiative to reduce NPAs in a time bound IDBI Bank Ltd. These 28 public sector banks are strategic approach. On the basis of the finding of the backbone of the Indian economy which are the proposed work, some remedial measures have playing a vital role in providing credit facilities in been suggested for the better management of rural, semi-urban and urban areas. All the public NPAs. sector banks are facing the problem of Non- NON-PERFORMING ASSETS – GLOBAL Performing Assets (NPA) which requires PERSPECTIVE: recovery measures to increase the profitability as The problem of non-performing assets (NPA) in well as good image for these banks. With the the banking system has been regarded as one of identification of problem of bad debts in early the major challenges for the financial stability and 1990’s, the accumulation of huge non-performing sustainable economic development at the global assets in all banks in general and public sector level. NPA is regarded as a threat to financial banks in particular has assumed greater stability because the mounting NPAs weaken the importance in the recent past. The situation has banking entity and the financial system and raises further worsened in the era of globalization, the possibility of contagion and resulting financial liberalization and privatization and the magnitude crisis. NPA is perceived as a challenge to of NPAs in banks and financial institutions is over sustainable economic development because it Rs. 1,50,000 crore. There is a global competition blocks the productive resources and its further use and the PSBs have to compete with the private in the productive channel. The problem of NPA sector banks and in this situation, the effective affects the financial health of bank, its and efficient management of NPA is of profitability and also disrupts the credit cycle. paramount importance for PSBs. While gross NPA in financial system has been a global NPA reflects the quality of the loans made by problem. Ernst and Young in its ‘Global NPL banks, net NPA shows the actual burden of banks. Report 2004’ had estimated the non-performing Public sector banks figure prominently in the loans at the global level to the tune of USD 1300 debate not only because they dominate the billion during 2003, of which around 77% was banking industries, but also since they have much from the Asian region. Japan and China together larger NPAs compared with the private sector constituted around 49% of the global NPA (RBI banks. NPA’s impact is on banks Profitability, Occasional Papers Vol.24-No.3 Winter 2003). Liquidity, Involvement of Management, Credit The NPA position in some of the major countries Loss and this raises a concern in the industry and is given in the Table 1. academia because it is generally felt that NPAs

Table 1: Ratio of Non-Performing Assets to Total Loans (%) Country 2001 2002 2003 United States 1.40 1.60 1.30 United kingdom 2.60 2.60 2.20 Japan 6.60 8.90 7.20 Germany 4.90 5.00 4.90 France 5.00 5.00 4.90 China 29.80 25.50 22.00 India 11.40 10.40 8.80

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 Sri Lanka 16.90 15.70 13.90 Pakistan 23.30 23.70 20.70 Thailand 10.50 15.80 15.50 Philippines 16.90 15.40 15.20 Source: RBI Occasional Papers Vol.24-No.3 Winter 2003. The published data reveal that the ratio of NPAs sub-standard account upto one year from the to total assets of banking sector in Asian region date of account turning NPA if the account is much higher than that of in Europe and USA. remains so. Thereafter, if the account remains The ratio of non-performing loans to total loans NPA for three years it is categorized as doubtful in USA was 1.3% in 2003. However, the same assets and thereafter it is categorized as loss was 22% in China, 20.7% in Pakistan, 15.5% in assets. Thailand, 15.2% in Philippines and 8.8% in In India, the gross NPA of scheduled India. However, the technological revolution, commercial banks (SCBs) in absolute terms was particularly in the information technology, risk continuously increasing up to Financial Year management under BASEL norms rapid (FY) 2002. However, the sustained reforms in globalization and integration of economies have the financial sector and the new enabling helped in containing the NPAs in the banking legislations have helped in containing the NPA system in a number of economies, particularly in position in Indian banking system and there has the economies under transition. been a sustained decline in the gross NPA of the NON-PERFORMING ASSETS – INDIAN scheduled commercial banks after FY 2002. SCENARIO: However, the gross NPA of scheduled An NPA account is defined as an account where commercial banks (SCBs) in absolute terms was the principal and interest remains overdue for again found to increase from Financial Year more than 90 days. Once an account is (FY) 2007 onwards. The status of gross NPA in categorized as NPA account it is categorized as scheduled commercial banks is given in the Table 2. Table 2: Gross NPA of Scheduled Commercial Banks (Rs. crore) Year Public Sector Private Sector Foreign SCB’s Total (as at end March) Banks Banks Banks 2000 53,033 4,761 2,614 60,408 2001 54,672 5,963 3,106 63,741 2002 56,473 11,662 2,726 70,861 2003 54,090 11,782 2,845 68,717 2004 51,538 10,354 2,894 64,786 2005 48,399 8,782 2,192 59,373 2006 41,358 7,811 1,928 51,097 2007 38,968 9,256 2,263 50,486 2008 40,452 12,997 2,859 56,309 2009 44,957 16,926 6,444 68,328 2010 59,926 17,639 7,133 84,698 2011 74,614 18,240 5,068 97,922 Source: RBI Report on Trend and Progress of Banking in India (various issues) OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY: The unprecedented growth in Non-Performing Two methods i.e. data collection and survey Asset (NPAs) in public sector banks has been a method have been adopted. concern to the bank itself as well as to the  Firstly the macro level data relating to Reserve Bank of India & Govt. To manage the NPAs was collected and for that data growth of NPAs in PSBs, it is necessary to know published in IBA Bulletin, the Journal of the factors responsible for this growth. This the banking studies and some other study basically aims at studying the NPA status articles and papers were studied. of SBIs branches in District Palwal (Haryana).  A comprehensive field survey of The objectives of the study will focus on. managers/field officers related to loans  To evaluate NPAs (Gross and Net) in and borrowers was conducted for which Branches under investigation. the data were collected from branches of  To evaluate profitability position of State Bank of India, Palwal District. branches under investigation. PRESENT STUDY:  To analyze the reasons for NPA and its In the present study a study has been carried out relation with operating profit of the on the Non-Performing AssetsManagement in Bank. Public Sector Banks (SBIs) in Palwal District of  Studying internal arrangements related Haryana. On the basis of the finding of the to internal systems, procedures and proposed work, some remedial measures have practices for monitoring the NPAs and been suggested for the better management of recovering the advances. NPAs.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 ABOUT THE STATE: National Capital Region (NCR) is that of The State of Haryana came into existence on 1st Haryana State. The State of Haryana is spread in of November 1966. Since then it has been the total area of 44,212 sq km. the total achieving an all round development. Its population of State of Haryana is around 2, importance lies in the fact that 30 per cent of its 53,53,081 with a literacy rate of 76.64%. total area, comprising the districts of Faridabad, A map indicating the State of Haryana is shown Mewat, Gurgaon, Rewari, Jhajjar, Rohtak, in fig. 1 and showing the location of its various Sonipat and Panipat, falls into the National districts and the state of infrastructure Capital Region (NCR) of India. Differently development in the State. stated, 40 per cent of the total area of the

Fig. 1: Geographical Map of Haryana State ABOUT THE DISTRICT: alluvium and Banger, an upland plain made of The district of Palwal was carved out of district older alluvial and is spread towards west. The of Faridabad and district Nuh in the year 2008 as general slope in the district is towards east. The the 21st district of state of Haryana (shown in levelled surface, fertile alluvial soil and facilities figure 2). It has the total area of 1359 sq km with for irrigation make the district best suited for around one million population. Palwal and intensive cultivation. The district enjoys with Faridabad districts have monotonous perennial river Yamuna, bordering it on the east. physiography and have alluvium deposits. The The river forms narrow but consistent flood alluvial plains have been divided into two units. plains. Khadar that is the low lying flood plain of newer

Fig. 2: Geographical Map of District Palwal NON-PERFORMING ASSETS – are two main cropping seasons, namely Kharif SCENARIO IN HARYANA STATE: and Rabi. Majority of the area is utilized for Economy of Palwal district: The district of agriculture during Rabi and Kharif (double crop) Palwal is dominated by the agriculture activities season due to better irrigation facilities in the and it is located in the south-east part of the region; major kharif crops include rice, jowar, State of Haryana bordering Uttar Pradesh. There bajra, gaur, maize, sugarcane, groundnut and

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 pulses. Rabi crops include wheat, barley, gram are New Grain Market, Palwal Branch, Main rapeseed/mustard and pulses. Palwal Branch, ADB Palwal, Hodal Branch and NPA Position in State Bank of India in Hathin Branch. The Branch-wise NPA position District Palwal:State Bank of India has total 5 of SBI in district Palwal is summarised in table 3 branches in Palwal district catering mainly to to 8 below agriculture and allied sector. These five branches . Table 3: NPA position in SBI Branch (New Grain Market, Palwal) (Rs. Crore)

Year Gross Advances Gross NPA Net Advances Net NPA

2010-11 10.71 0.02 10.71 0.01 2011-12 10.21 0.03 10.21 0.02 2012-13 14.95 0.09 14.95 0.07

Table 4: NPA position in SBI Branch (Main SBI, Palwal) (Rs. Crore) Year Gross Advances Gross NPA Net Advances Net NPA 2010-11 38.43 1.08 38.43 0.63 2011-12 36.99 0.86 36.99 0.45 2012-13 41.49 0.46 41.49 0.21

Table 5: NPA position in SBI Branch {Agriculture Development Branch (ADB) Palwal} (Rs. Crore) Year Gross Advances Gross NPA Net Advances Net NPA 2010-11 38.43 1.08 38.43 0.63 2011-12 36.99 0.86 36.99 0.45 2012-13 41.49 0.46 41.49 0.21 Table 6: NPA position in SBI Branch (Hathin, District Palwal) (Rs. Crore) Year Gross Advances Gross NPA Net Advances Net NPA 2010-11 16.10 6.09 16.10 4.82 2011-12 13.56 5.67 13.56 3.19 2012-13 15.35 4.58 15.35 1.57 Table 7: NPA position in SBI Branch (Hodal, District Palwal) (Rs. Crore) Year Gross Advances Gross NPA Net Advances Net NPA 2010-11 9.87 5.02 9.87 3.01 2011-12 12.36 5.87 12.36 3.19 2012-13 16.21 4.26 16.21 1.55 Table 8: Total NPA of SBI in Palwal District (Rs. Crore) Year Gross Advances Gross NPA 2010-11 102.59 21.14 2011-12 99.54 19.68 2012-13 120.65 15.79 Source: State Bank of India DATA ANALYSIS AND 2010-11 to 2012-13. The major NPA has been in INTERPRETATION: the agriculture sector and other sectors which It may be observed from the above table that primarily include the government sponsored gross NPA constituted around 20.60% of the schemes. It was also observed that impact of gross advances of SBI in district Palwal during default in the advances under Kisan Credit Card 2010-11. During 2012-13 the ratio of gross NPA and Tractor loan was higher in certain branches. to gross advances declined to 13.08% which NPA has also been in the areas of MSME sector indicate a significant improvement in the quality in New Grain Market branch. There has been of portfolio. BO-wise NPA analysis shows that several factors that have contributed to the the major portion of SBI NPA is concentrated in reduction in NPA over the years which are Hathin and Hodal branches. Around 29.83% of analysed in the subsequent paragraph. the gross advances at Hathin branch was NPA as MAJOR CAUSES OF NPA IN SBI IN on March 31, 2013 and around 26.28% of total DISTRICT PALWAL: portfolio of Hodal branch was NPA as on March In the course of completion of this minor project 31, 2013. However, the notable fact was that wide consultations were held with the bankers, there has been decline in the ratio of gross NPA farmers, traders and entrepreneurs to assess the to gross advances in all the branches during causes of NPA in SBI in district Palwal. The

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 following causes were found for the NPA in SBI CONCLUSIONS & in district Palwal. RECOMMENDATIONS:  Majority of the loans extended by SBI The banking system in India is facing the in district Palwal is agriculture challenge of growing NPA on account of several advances. The agriculture is mainly factors. The current economic scenario is also dependent on monsoon. Deficient not very bullish and the recent Financial monsoon has created negative impact Stability Report published by Reserve Bank of on agriculture and in turn affected the India reveals that deteriorating quality of assets repaying capacity of farmers causing to in the Indian Banking system is causing a great default. challenge to the financial stability in the country.  It was found that the loans were availed Several measures such as establishment of Debt by the by the borrowers for acquiring Recovery Tribunals (DRT), Lok Adalats and the tractor and other passing of SARFAESI Act have been taken by implements/machinery to generate Government and RBI to contain the NPA in the income through job work. The Indian banking system. These measures have slowdown in the infrastructure sector yielded the positive results and since the passing affected the earning prospects and the of SARFAESI Act, there has been decline in income and this lead to default and NPA in the Indian banking system. The data increase in NPA. analysis of SBI Branches in Palwal district also  The income generated through reveals that the NPA has declined in various SBI agriculture is not significant for several branches in the past three years. farmers on account of small land In order to contain the NPA the following is holdings. The farmers generally divert recommended based on the survey and the fund drawn on Kisan Credit Card interaction held with the stakeholders in district for the marriage and construction of Palwal: pucca houses. As the loan is utilised for  There is urgent need to sensitise the non productive purposes, repayment farmers and self employed persons becomes a problem and account turns availing the credit facility from the NPA. banking system regarding avoiding the  The effects of debt waiver/relief use of the borrowed fund for the scheme 2008 have been highly negative unproductive purpose. This adversely in terms of willingness to repaying the affects the repaying capacity of the debt to banks by the borrowers. After borrower and pushes it to debt trap. availing the loan, the borrowers tempt  The loan waiver scheme should be not to repay the loan in the hope that stopped. If at all government wish to the Govt may waive the loan in near help the borrowers it may be done future. Infact such schemes act as through other channels such as direct catalyst for increasing the NPA in the transfer of subsidy, etc. banking sector.  During the time of adverse climatic  In the industrial sector it was observed conditions such as drought, flood, etc. that loans given to small enterprises the farmers should be suitably helped by were mainly to the units catering to the the Government so that their financial auto component sector. In view of the position should not deteriorate fact that the auto sector is currently significantly. passing through the slowdown, there  Banks should enhance their follow up has been growth in NPA in this sector. and monitoring mechanism to avoid the  The loans extended under the slippages. This would help both the government sponsored schemes such as bank and the borrower from turning the Prime Minister Rozgar Yojana has not account bad as suitable steps such as been able to generate successful restructuring of accounts may be ventures. It was observed that the undertaken at the appropriate time. defaults in this segment were largely  Efforts should be made on the part of wilful. banks that wilful defaulters should be  The small trade loans were turned bad identified and such action should be on account of emergence of more taken so that wilful default must organised shops in the vicinity. It was discourage. observed that certain players availed the  The credit availed under Kisan Credit loan to establish shops and in view of Card and Prime Minister Rozgar Yojana the fact that some bigger shop came in and other government sponsored the same locality which attracted the schemes should be more closely customers and over a period of time the monitored. small shopkeeper could not generate BIBLIOGRAPHY sufficient revenue to service the debt causing default.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 Books, Journals and Magazines: 20. Krishnamurti, R. (2001). Programme of 1. Agarwal, O.P. (2011). Banking and NPA and Recovery Management, Insurance, Himalaya Publishing House, Canara Bank Staff Training College, 2ndedition Mumbai. Bangalore, Edition 2001. 2. Arthshastra: Indian Journal of 21. Maheswari, Y. (2013). Banking Sector- Economics and Research, ISSN 2278- Financial Analysis during Post Reform 1811, Associated Management Era, Int. J. Marketing, Financial Consultants (Pvt.) Ltd. New Delhi. Services & Management Research, 3. Athmanathan, S. and Venkatakrishanan, ISSN 2277- 3622, Vol.2, No. 9, R. 2001, Management of NPAs, State September (2013). Bank Staff College, Distance Learning 22. Manoranjan, S.(2004). Banking Department, Hyderabad-Edition July, consolidation must be synergy-driven, 2001. The HINDU Business Line, Thursday, 4. Banerjee, A. and Singh, S.K.(2001). Dec. 30. Banking and financial sector reforms in 23. Master Circular of RBI-DBOD-MC on India, Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. IRAC Norms, 2013. Ltd., New Delhi. 24. M.P.M. Vinay Kumar, 5. Bank Quests of Indian Institute of “SECURITISATION: ISSUES AND Bankers, Mumbai. PERSPECTIVES”, Treasury 6. Banking Digests, J.S. Institute of Management, December 2004 (62-65). Banking and Finance, Bangalore. 25. Murali, S. and Subbakrishna, K.R. 7. Banking Questionnaire, State Bank (2012). Bank Credit Management, 2nd Learning Centre, Agra, 16th Edition, edition, Himalaya Publishing House, March, 2009. Mumbai. 8. K.C. Shekhar & Lekshmy Shekhar 26. Radhakrishna, A.K.(2012). Financial (2010).Banking Theory and Practice, Fraud in Banking Sector and its 20th edition, Vikas Publishing House Consequential Impact on Banking Private Limited, 2010. System, 1st edition, Himalaya Publishing 9. Batra, G.S. and Dangwal, R.C. (1999). House, Mumbai. Banking and development finance: New 27. Raj Kumar S. Adukia, Vistas, Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. “SECURITISATION – AN Ltd., New Delhi,1999 OVERVIEW”, The chartered 10. Bhattacharya, K.M.(2012). Risk Accountant, February 2005 (978-985). Management in Indian Banks, 3rdedition, 28. Reserve Bank of India (RBI) Occasional Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai. Papers, Vol. 24 (3), Winter 2003. 11. Carlton Pereira, “Investing in NPAs”, 29. Reserve Bank of India 2004-05, Report Economic and Political Weekly, on trend and progress of baking in India, October 16, 2004 (4602-4604). Published by Gunjeet Kaur for 12. Das, M.R., Patwardhan, D.G., Kumar, S. the Reserve Bank of India, Mumbai 400 and Bansal, S. (2013). Advanced Bank 001. Management, Indian Institute of 30. Rural Planning and Credit Department Banking and Finance, Macmillan (RPCD) Circular RPCD, PLNFS, BC. Publishers India Limited,2013 No. 83/06.02.31/2004-2005, March 01, 13. Datey, V.S. (2003). Securitisation, 2005. Reconstruction and Enforcement of 31. Shekhar, K.C. and Shekhar, L. (2010) Security Interest, Chartered Secretary, Banking Theory and Practice, 20th pp. 128-135. edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. 14. Dhaka, B.P. (2004).SARFAESI ACT: Ltd. Noida (U.P.). THE DIAGNOSIS,Chartered Financial 32. State Bank Monthly Review, SBI, Analyst, August 2004, pp. 58-62. Central Office, Mumbai. 15. “SARFAESI ACT: THE 33. SBI Economic News Letter, SBI, Local DIAGNOSIS”, Chartered Financial Head Office (LHO), New Delhi. Analyst, August 2004 (58-62). 34. SBI Group Banking Guide by G. 16. Economic Times, Daily News Paper. Subramanian, 19th Edition, February, 17. Guruswamy, S. (2001). Banking in the 2009. New Millennium: Issues, Challenges 35. SBI Inspection Reports. and Strategies,Kanishka Publishers, 36. Tannan, M.L. (2012). Banking Law and New Delhi,2001 Practice in India, 23rd edition, Publisher 18. IBA Monthly Bulletins, Indian Banks LexisNexis Butterworths Wadhwa, Association, Mumbai. Nagpur. 19. International Journal of Trends in 37. The Banking Regulation Act, 1949, No. Banking Industry (IJTIBI), ISSN 2279- 10 of 1949, printed in 2012, Commercial 0372, Academic Journal Online, New Law Publishers (India) Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. Delhi. 38. The Hindu, Thursday, September 20, 2001.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 39. The Indian Banker published by The Indian Banks’ Association, Mumbai.. 40. The Journals of Banking Studies, New Delhi. 41. Varshney, P.N. (2010). Banking Law and Practice, 24th edition, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi,2010 Websites: 1. http://www.indiastat.com/banksandfinan cialinstitutions/3/performance/16063/no nperformingassetsnpas/377761/stats.asp x 2. http://www.bankcapitalgroup.net/service s-non-performing-assets.php 3. http://rituparnodas.blogspot.com/2009/0 1/npa-management.html 4. http://www.finanssivalvonta.fi/en/Statist ics/Credit_market/Nonperforming_asset s/Pages/Default.aspx 5. http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb5 562/is_200905/ai_n31896461/ 6. http://www.econ.uconn.edu

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 PARENTING STYLE ANDPSYCHOSOCIAL WELL BEING OF THE INDIVIDUAL

Dr. Sunita Tawner Assistant Professor, Department of Management Studies Central University Haryana, Haryana, India E-mail: [email protected], Mob: 090502-27447

ABSTRACT: Parenting style during early childhood period plays a significant role in development of psychosocial wellbeing of the individual. It’s a literature review based study. Research is concluded on the bases of different research findings. The findings of the study shall be helpful to the child, developmental and social psychologists, researchers, counselors, social workers and parents in understanding the psychology of individuals. The study will provide strategies for families to cope up with the problems of the individual and their growth. Keywords: parenting style, psychosocialwellbeing, disorder, INTRODUCTION: Growing up in a comforting home and Parenting is a complex activity that includes experiencing a stable and secure relationship many specific behaviors that work individually with one’s parents is an important prerequisite and together to influence child outcomes. for socialization (Vandeleur, Perrez, & Schoebi, Although specific parenting behaviors, such as 2007). Parsons (1955) defined the family as the spanking or reading aloud, may influence child ‘‘factory where personality is made’’. The development, looking at any specific behavior in vehicle through which the parents’ attitudes are isolation may be misleading. Many writers have experienced is parenting style. noted that specific parenting practices are less Parenting style can be defined as the perception important in predicting child well-being than is of the children about their parents’ behaviours the broad pattern of parenting. Most researchers throughout their childhood. These behaviours who attempt to describe this broad parental should not be the real ones; the perception of the milieu rely on Diana Baumrind’s concept of child is important. There are three kinds of parenting style. The construct of parenting style parenting style; “rejection”, “overprotection” is used to capture normal variations in parents’ and emotional warmth”. attempts to control and socialize their children Darling and Steinberg (1993) conceptualized the (Baumrind, 1991). Two points are critical in parenting styles as a constellation of attitudes understanding this definition. First, parenting toward the child that are communicated to the style is meant to describenormal variations in child, and that, taken together, create an parenting. In other words, the parenting style emotional climate in which the parents’ typology Baumrind developed should not be behaviors are expressed. understood to include deviant parenting, such as According to Steinberg, Lamborn, Dornbusch, & might be observed in abusive or neglectful Darling (1992) there are three styles of parenting homes. Second, Baumrind assumes that normal including: “acceptance-involvement”, parenting revolves around issues of control. “psychological autonomy-granting” and Although parents may differ in how they try to “behavioral strictness supervision”. Acceptance- control or socialize their children and the extent involvement is based on one’s perception of to which they do so, it is assumed that the amount of paying attention and responsiveness primary role of all parents is to influence, teach, of parents; these parents are warm, firm, and control their children. involved, and sensitive to their children’s PARENTING STYLE: changing needs, and set realistic standards and Parenting style captures two important elements clear rules (Jaffe, 1998). Psychological of parenting: parental responsiveness and autonomy-granting parenting styles refer to parental demandingness (Maccoby & Martin, parent’s tolerance against children’s opinions, 1983). Parental responsiveness (also referred to and they use democratic discipline in parent- as parental warmth or supportiveness) refers to child relationship also the parents don’t push "the extent to which parents intentionally foster their children to compliant the rules. In individuality, self-regulation, and self-assertion behavioral strictness-supervision style, parents by being attuned, supportive, and acquiescent to shape, control and evaluate the behavior and children’s special needs and demands" attitudes of the child in accordance with a set of (Baumrind, 1991, p. 62). Parental standards of conduct, usually the absolute demandingness (also referred to as behavioral standards (Baumrind 1996), and child is not control) refers to "the claims parents make on allowed to express his opinions and there is little children to become integrated into the family opportunity to think about situations or employ whole, by their maturity demands, supervision, reasoning (Knight, et al., 2000). disciplinary efforts and willingness to confront Krohne (1988) defined parenting styles as a set the child who disobeys" (Baumrind, 1991, pp. of relatively stable behaviors through which 61-62). parents interact with their child in relatively specific situations, thus emphasizing that parents

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 may show a relatively uniform set of behaviors difficulties in making decisions in adulthood in a given context. For example, a parent with (Whitfield, 1987; Forward, 1989; Baumrind, low degree of support will not encourage his or 1991; Bigner, 1994; Wenar, 1994). her child to help with the housework, nor to Authoritarian parenting has been associated with achieve academic grades. In contrast, a parent more negative outcomes in children and with a high degree of support will give positive adolescents. Children of authoritarian parents and encouraging feedback to his or her child have been described as less content, less regardless of whether the child has finished affiliative toward peers, and more insecure, homework or is engaged in other activities such apprehensive, and hostile (Baumrind, 1971). A as challenging sports activities or making music. “firm but nonaccepting maternal style,” Many studies have documented that parenting characteristic of authoritarian homes, has been has a powerful influence in child development. associated with an increase in acting-out Parenting styles can be described as patterns of behaviors (Forehand & Nousiainen, 1993). behaviour that primary caregivers use to interact When conduct disordered and normal with their children. These patterns of adolescents’ ratings of perceived parenting were childrearing create an emotional climate in compared, juveniles with conduct disorder which the parent's behaviours are expressed tended to view their parents as more (Baumrind, 1971, 1977; Coplan, Hasting, overprotective and less caring (Rey & Plapp, Lagace-Seguin, & Moulton, 2002; Darling & 1990). Steinberg, 1993). The authoritarian parenting style has acquired a Baumrind (1971, 1989, and 1991) and Maccoby negative connotation in Western literature, and Martin (1983) outlined demanding and primarily because of the negative child and responsiveness as two independent dimensions adolescent outcomes frequently associated with of parenting. Demanding refers to the extent to it. Parenting styles among Asian parents (in which parents show control, power assertion, particular, Chinese parents) have been maturity demands, and supervision in their variously described as ‘‘authoritarian’’, parenting. Responsiveness refers to the extent to ‘‘controlling’’, ‘‘restrictive’’ and ‘‘hostile’’ (Lin which parents show their children affective & Fu, 1990; Steinberg, Dornbusch, & Brown, warmth, emotional expression, acceptance, and 1992). Scoring high on authoritarianism may support. Based on the degree of parental have different meanings and implications for demanding and responsiveness, four parenting Asians than for Caucasians due to their different styles have been described (Baumrind, 1991; cultural systems. For Caucasians, ‘‘strictness’’ Maccoby & Martin, 1983): authoritative (both may be equated with negative characteristics demanding and responsive), authoritarian such as parental hostility, aggression, and (demanding but not responsive), permissive dominance, but for Asians, ‘‘strictness’’ and (responsive but not demanding), and neglectful some aspects of ‘‘control’’ may be equated with (neither demanding nor responsive). Each type positive characteristics such as parental concern, of parenting is believed to differentially caring, or involvement (Chao, 1994; Lau & influence child perfectionist characteristics. Cheung, 1987). AUTHORITARIAN PARENTING STYLE: PERMISSIVE PARENTING STYLE: According to Baumrind (1966, p. 890), the Parents who adopt the permissive style authoritarian parent “values obedience and encourage their children’s autonomy and enable restricts autonomy.” Parents described as them to make their own decisions and regulate authoritarian believe in strict adherence to their their own activities. They avoid confrontation rules, are unlikely to discuss rules with their and tend to be warm, supportive people and do children, and emphasize discipline and not care to be viewed by their children as figures obedience. They typically score lowon measures of authority. Children raised by permissive of parental warmth or responsiveness. These parents have poor social skills and low self- parents provide well-ordered and structured esteem (Baumrind, 1991; Reitman et al., 2002) environments with clearly stated rules. and are often seen as selfish, dependent, Authoritarian parents can be divided into two irresponsible, spoiled, unruly, inconsiderate of types: nonauthoritarian-directive, who are other’s needs, and antisocial (Bigner, 1994; directive, but not intrusive or autocratic in their Wenar, 1994). use of power, and authoritarian-directive, who AUTHORITATIVE PARENTING STYLE are highly intrusive. Authoritative parenting in Baumrind’s Parents who practice the authoritarian style classification is documented as being the optimal focus on their control of the child, and his/her parenting style with regard to child outcomes. obedience. They restrict the autonomy of their Specifically, authoritative parenting style has children and decide what appropriate behaviour repeatedly been found to be correlated with is for them (Baumrind, 1983; Reitman, Rhode, positive self-perceptions while authoritarian Hupp, & Altobello, 2002). A variety of problems parenting style has repeatedly been found to be were identified among the children of correlated with negative self-perceptions (Buri, authoritarian parents in the west. These children Lousielle, Misukanis, & Mueller, 1988; Klein, tend to be uncooperative and to suffer from Bryant, & Hopkins, 1996; Lamborn et al., 1991; depression, low self-esteem, low initiative, and Pawlak & Klein, 1997).

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 Baumrind’s early research, confirmed by more interviews, child reports, and parent recent studies, identified authoritative parenting observations consistently finds: as a key determinant of children’s and Children and adolescents whose parents adolescents’ psychosocial well-being (Lamborn, are authoritative rate themselves and are rated Mounts, Steinberg, & Dornbusch, 1991; Slicker, by objective measures as more socially and 1998). Interview and observational data instrumentally competent than those whose collected by Baumrind (1967) suggested that the parents are nonauthoritative (Baumrind, 1991; most well socialized and independent Weiss & Schwarz, 1996; Miller et al., preschoolers were raised in authoritative 1993). Children and adolescents whose parents households. More recently, adolescents who are uninvolved perform most poorly in all described their parents as authoritative scored domains. highest on measures of psychosocial competence In general, parental responsiveness predicts and maturity and lowest on measures of social competence and psychosocial functioning, psychological and behavioral dysfunction while parental demandingness is associated with (Lamborn et al., 1991; Mantzicopoulos & Oh- instrumental competence and behavioral control Hwang, 1998). They were less likely to be (i.e., academic performance and deviance). anxious or depressed and scored higher on These findings indicate: measures of self-reliance (Radziszewska, Children and adolescents Richardson, Dent,&Flay, 1996; Steinberg, from authoritarian families (high in Mounts, Lamborn,&Dornbusch, 1991). demandingness, but low in responsiveness) tend The authoritative style is a compromise between to perform moderately well in school and be the authoritarian and the permissive style. uninvolved in problem behavior, but they have Parents who adopt this style tend to have good poorer social skills, lower self-esteem, and nurturing skills and exercise moderate parental higher levels of depression.Children and control to allow the child to become adolescents from indulgent homes (high in progressively more autonomous (Baumrind, responsiveness, low in demandingness) are more 1966, 1967, 1983, 1991; Reitman et al., 2002). likely to be involved in problem behavior and Children raised according to this style of parent perform less well in school, but they have higher are not completely restricted but rather are self-esteem, better social skills, and lower levels allowed a reasonable degree of latitude in their of depression. behaviour. Parents do enforce limits in various In reviewing the literature on parenting style, ways such as reasoning, verbal give and take, one is struck by the consistency with which overt power, and positive reinforcements. authoritative upbringing is associated with both Children of authoritative parents display high instrumental and social competence and lower self-esteem and tend to be self-reliant, self- levels of problem behavior in both boys and girls controlled, secure, popular, and inquisitive at all developmental stages. The benefits of (Buri, Louiselle, Misukanis, & Mueller, 1988; authoritative parenting and the detrimental Wenar, 1994). They manifest fewer effects of uninvolved parenting are evident as psychological and behavioural problems than early as the preschool years and continue youth who are raised by authoritarian or throughout adolescence and into early permissive parents (Lamborn, Mants, Steinberg, adulthood. Although specific differences can be & Dornbusch, 1991). (For review of parental found in the competence evidenced by each discipline, see Maccoby & Martin, 1983) group, the largest differences are found between Authoritative parents are attuned to their child’s children whose parents are unengaged and their needs [which] helps the child to master early peers with more involved parents. Differences stage-salient developmental tasks and on that between children from authoritative homes and base to build more differentiated, complex their peers are equally consistent, but somewhat capacities needed to master significant smaller (Weiss & Schwarz, 1996). Just as environmental challenges (Wyman et al., 1999). authoritative parents appear to be able to balance Families can also be a risk. Adolescents who their conformity demands with their respect for grow up in chronically distressed families are their children’s individuality, so children from likely to develop serious social and emotional authoritative homes appear to be able to balance problems (Jaffe, 1998), impacting the the claims of external conformity and adolescent’s ability to cope with stress. achievement demands with their need for Uninvolved parents are low in both individuation and autonomy. responsiveness and demandingness. In extreme Inconsistent results regarding the effects of cases, this parenting style might encompass both parenting style on children have emerged from rejecting–neglecting and neglectful parents, research among non-white cultures (Stewart & although most parents of this type fall within the Bond, 2002). In some studies, levels of self- normal range. concept, self-esteem, and academic performance Consequences for Children:Parenting style has of African-Americans (Baumrind, 1972; Taylor, been found to predict child well-being in the Hinton, & Wilson, 1995) and of Asian domains of social competence, academic Americans (Steinberg, Lamborn, Darling, performance, psychosocial development, and Mounts, & Dornbusch, 1992) have been shown problem behavior. Research based on parent to be lower, whether the authoritarian or the

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 permissive parenting style is implemented. and Krohne and Pulsack (1995) proposed a Conversely, the results of some studies have concept of perceived parenting styles, which shown that the authoritarian parenting style allows a differentiated approach and treatment produced the most assertive and independent assessment for parents undergoing family African American girls (Baumrind, 1972), and therapy or parenting counseling. Krohne and was related to higher competence in a high-risk Pulsack’s (1995) concept consists of two environment (Baldwin, Baldwin, & Cole, 1990). positive and three negative dimensions. Support, According to the findings of Steinberg, the degree to which a child feels supported in his Lamborn, Dornbusch, and Darling (1994), Asian or her activities, and Commendation, the degree Americans benefited more from the authoritarian with which a child feels he or she receives than from the authoritative parenting style in positive verbal feedback, are considered as terms of adjustment and academic performance. positive parenting styles. Considered as negative Among Chinese families in Hong Kong and the parenting styles are: Reproach, the way parents People’s Republic of China, while the give negative verbal reactions; Restriction, the authoritarian parenting style was found to effect way parents do not allow or encourage the achievement level of the children positively, autonomous responsible behavior or decision the authoritative style had no effect in this regard making in their child; and Inconsistency, the (Leung, Lau, & Lam, 1998). The achievement degree with which a child perceives his or her levels of first-generation Chinese immigrants in parent’s behavior as not consistent and therefore USA also benefit less from the authoritative as not predictable over time with respect to his style than those of European Americans (Chao, or her own behavior. 2001). Recent research confirmed the influences of Additionaly, authoritative parenting has also parenting styles on adolescent’s mental health been shown to foster secure attachments (Fletcher, Steinberg, & Sellers, 1999). Parents between children and their caregiver and to facilitate positive adjustment of children when contribute to a greater sense of autonomy they are exposed to threatening and stressful (Karavasilis, Doyle, & Markiewicz, 2003). conditions by emotional and behavioral supports General parenting styles have been found to (Werner, 1989). Werner and Smith (1982) relate to children’s development (Collins, founded out that the mothers who dealt with Maccoby, Steinberg, Hetherington, & Bornstein, their children in a positive way by acceptance, 2000), and authoritative parenting in particular kindness, control and support, in comparison has been found to have beneficial effects on with the children who had not these experiences, adolescent lifestyles. Adolescents being raised in showed high or level of resilience. an authoritative parenting climate eat more fruit, Parenting practices consist of several important smoke less, drink less alcohol, and are less likely parenting constructs, such as parental to use marihuana (e.g., Jackson, Henriksen, & expectations and parental beliefs (see Jeynes Foshee, 1998; Kremers, Brug, De Vries, & 2010a, b). Parents’ expectations for their Engels, 2003; Radziszewska, Richardson, Dent, children’s educational future and parental beliefs & Flay, 1996). In addition, adolescents with about the importance of good grades and authoritative parents show better psychosocial schooling beyond the high school level are development greater academic competence, less important antecedents of children’s school delinquent behavior, and fewer somatic performance (see Aunola et al. 2003; Bronstein symptoms (e.g., Steinberg, Lamborn, Darling, et al. 2005; Davis-Kean 2005; Spera et al. 2009; Mounts, & Dornbusch, 1994). Scott-Jones 1995). Lamborn et al. (1991) found that adolescents RESULTS AND DISCUSSION: who considered their parents to be authoritative Adolescents exposed to authoritative parents had higher levels of psychological competence rather than to authoritarian or permissive parents and lower levels of psychological and behavioral may be protected from a number of problematic dysfunction in comparison to adolescents who behavioral outcomes. Authoritative parenting perceived their parents as neglectful. Students has been positively linked to psychosocial who believe they have authoritarian parents do competence, academic success, fewer well with obedience and conformity to adult internalizing problems (Steinberg, 2001), fewer standards however, they show relatively poor externalizing problems (Patock-Peckham & self-conceptions. Adolescents with Morgan-Lopez, 2006; Steinberg, 2001), and permissive/indulgent parents have a strong self- higher levels of self-regulatory skills among confidence but they also experience more young women (Patock-Peckham et al., 2001). problems with drug experimentation and Adolescents whose relationships are misconduct in and outside of school. In a two characterized by insecurity are at risk of adverse year follow-up of the Lamborn et al. (1991) outcomes including the development of a sense study, Steinberg et al. (1994) reported similar of learned helplessness. Such dysfunctional patterns of adjustment as a function of parenting relationships also impair progress towards style over time. independence and are predictive of With respect to the association between compromised social and personality perceived parenting style and development (Bowlby, 1977; Parker, 1993) all psychopathological symptoms, Krohne (1988)

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 of which place the individual at risk for the in the organization of attachment: development of depression. Mothers' responsiveness as a moderator Jackson (2002) found that when compared with of children's genotypes. Journal of Child adolescents exposed to authoritative parenting, Psychology & Psychiatry, 49, “those exposed to permissive, authoritarian, and 1313−1320. indifferent parenting were 1.8 to 5.9 times as 3. Baumrind, D. (1966). Effects of likely to deny parental authority regarding authoritative parental control on child alcohol use”. Because an authoritative parenting behavior. Child Development, 37, 887– style encompasses both clear direction and 907. emotional warmth, we expected that this style 4. Baumrind, D. (1967). Childcare would be positively linked to positive bonds practices anteceding three patterns of (perceptions of caring) with one’s parents and preschool behavior. Genetic Psychology negatively linked to negative bonds (perceptions Monographs, 75, 43–88. of rejection) with one’s parents. 5. Baumrind, D. (1983). Socialization and Warm bonds with one’s parents can have a instrumental competence in young lasting impact on one’s life and are reasonably children. In W. Damon (Ed.), Social and stable over time (Wel, Linssen, & Abma, 2000). personality development (pp. 197–211). Parents play a significant role in their children’s New York: W.W. Norton. development of personal identity (Allen, Hauser, 6. Baumrind, D. (1991). The influence of Bell, & O’Connor, 1994), positive self-image parenting style on adolescent (Wenk, Hardesty, Morgan, & Blair, 1994), competence and substance use. Journal expressions of implicit self-esteem (DeHart, of Early Adolescence, 11, 56–95. Pelham, & Tennen, 2006), life satisfaction 7. Beardslee, W. R., Versage, E. M., & (Leung & Leung, 1992), and social competence Gladstone, T. R. G. (1998). Children of (Paterson, Pryor, & Field, 1995), which in turn, affectively ill parents: A review of the are linked with level of depression. past 10 years. Journal of the American In contrast, rejecting parenting (characterized by Academy of Child & Adolescent a lack of emotional warmth) has been Psychiatry, 37, 1134−1141. significantly associated with a lack of self- 8. Bigner, J. J. (1994). Individual and acceptance, low self-esteem, and an inability to family development: A life-span be selfdirected (Schlette et al., 1998). Moreover, interdisciplinary approach. Englewood poor parental bonds have been linked to Cliffs, NJ:Prentice-Hall. internalizing problems, stress, depression 9. Birmaher, B., Brent, D., Chiappetta, L., (Burstein, Stanger, Kamon, & Dumenci, 2006; Bridge, J., Monga, S., & Baugher, M. Lasko et al., 1996; Nada Raja, McGee, & (1999). Psychometric properties of the Stanton, 1992); problems with alcohol (Barnow Screen for Child Anxiety Related et al., 2002); problem behavior (Windle & Emotional Disorders (SCARED): a Miller-Tutzauer, 1992); and higher levels of replication study. Journal of the aggression in female offspring (Brook, AmericanAcademy of Child and Whiteman, & Finch, 1993). Although Adolescent Psychiatry, 38, 1230–1236. investigators have reported that the influence of 10. Caspi, A., Sugden, K., Moffitt, T. E., the mother may be more important than that of Taylor, A., Craig, I. W., Harrington, H., the father (Field, Lang, Yando, & Bendell, 1995; et al. (2003). Influence of life stress on LeCroy, 1988; Thornton, Orbuch, & Axinn, depression: Moderation by a 1995), it is unclear whether this is the case polymorphism in the 5-HTT gene. regarding depressive symptoms (Pedersen, Science, 301, 386−389. 1994). 11. Chao, R. K. (1994). Beyond parental Relationships with parents and the family control and authoritarian parenting style: environment have been strongly linked to Understanding Chinese parenting depressive outcomes and problematic drinking. through the cultural notion of training. In a longitudinal study that observed infants Child Development, 65, 1111–1120. until the age of 15 years, Nada Raja et al. (1992) 12. Chao, R. K. (2001). Extending research found that those who reported low perceived on the consequences of parenting style attachment to parents were also more likely to for Chinese Americans and European experience a greater number of negative life Americans. Child Development, 72(6), events and have conduct problems such as 1832–1843. inattention and depression. 13. Choi, W.S., Patten, C.A., Gillin, J.C., REFERENCES Kaplan, R.M., & Pierce, J.P. (1997). 1. Abramson, L. Y., Seligman, M.E.P., & Cigarette smoking predicts development Teasdale, J. D. (1978). Learned of depressive symptoms among US helplessness in humans: Critique and adolescents. Annals of Behavioral reformulation. Journal of Abnormal Medicine, 19, 42–50. Psychology, 87, 49-74. 14. Dadds, M. R., Sanders, M. R., Morrison, 2. Barry, R. A., Kochanska, G., & M., & Rebgetz, M. (1992). Childhood Philibert, R. A. (2008). G×E interaction depression and conduct disorder: II. An

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 analysis of family interaction patterns in 25. Steinberg, L., Lamborn, S. D., Darling, the home. Journal of Abnormal N., Mounts, N. S., & Dornbusch, S. M. Psychology, 101, 505-513. (1994). Over-time changes in 15. Darling, N., & Steinberg, L. (1993). adjustment and competence among Parenting style as context: an integrative adolescents from authoritative, model. Psychological Bulletin, 113, authoritarian, indulgent, and uninvolved 487-496. families. Child Development, 65, 754– 16. Forehand, R., & Nousiainen, S. (1993). 770. Maternal and paternal parenting: Critical 26. Steinberg, L., Lamborn, S. D., dimensions in adolescent functioning. Dornbusch, S. M., & Darling, N. (1994). Journal of Family Psychology, 7, 213– Impact of parenting practices on 221. adolescent achievement: Authoritative 17. Forehand, R., Brody, J., Slotkin, J., parenting, school involvement, and Fauber, R., McCombs, A., & Long, N. encouragement to succeed. Child (1988). Young adolescent and maternal Development, 63, 1266–1281. depression: Assessment, interrelations, 27. Stewart, S. M., & Bond, M. H. (2002). and family predictors. Journal of A critical look at parenting research Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 56, from the mainstream: Problems 422-426. uncovered while adapting Western research to non-Western cultures. 18. Krohne, H. W. (1988). British Journal of Developmental Erziehungsstilforschung: Neuere Psychology, 20, 379–392. theoretische Ansa¨ tze und empirische 28. Vandeleur, C. L., Perrez, M., & Schoebi, Befunde. [Research on parenting styles: D. (2007). Associations between recent theoretical approaches and measures of emotion and familial empiric findings]. Zeitschrift fu¨r dynamics in normative families with Pa¨dagogische Psychologie, 2, 157-172. adolescents. Swiss Journal of 19. Krohne, H. W., & Pulsack, A. (1995). Psychology, 66(1), 5-16. Erziehungsstil-Inventar. [Parenting style 29. Wolfradt, U., Hempel, S., & Miles, J. N. inventory]. Go¨ ttingen: Hogrefe. V. (2003). Perceived parenting styles, 20. Klein, D. N., Lewinsohn, P. M., Rohde, depersonalization, anxiety and coping P., Seeley, J. R., & Olino, T. M. (2005). behaviour in adolescents. Personality Psychopathology in the adolescent and and Individual Differences, 34, 521-532. young adult offspring of a community 30. Wyman, P. A., Cowen, E. L., Work, W. sample of mothers and fathers with C., Hoyt-Meyers, L., Magnus, K .B. and major depression. Psychological Fagen, D. B. (1999). Caregiving and Medicine, 35, 353−365. Developmental factors differentiating 21. Lamborn, S. D., Mants, N. S., Steinberg, young at-risk urban children showing L., & Dornbusch, S. M. (1991). Patterns resilient versus stress-affected outcomes. of competence and adjustment among Child Development, 70, 645 – 659. adolescents from authoritative, authoritarian, indulgent, and neglectful families. Child Development, 62, 1049– 1106. 22. Lin, C. C., & Fu, V. R. (1990). A comparison of child-rearing practices among Chinese, immigrant Chinese, and Caucasian-American parents. Child Development, 61, 429–433. 23. Moilanen, D. L. (1993). Depressive information processing among nonclinic, nonreferred college students. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 40, 340-347. 24. Moilanen, D. L. (1995). Validity of Beck's cognitive theory of depression with nonreferred adolescents. Journal of Counseling & Development, 73, 438- 442.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT: AN INTEGRATED APPROACH IN LIBRARIES

Roop Kishore Email: [email protected] Contact: 9802734134 Assistant Librarian, M.D.University, Rohtak-124001.

ABSTRACT: The term knowledge management describes the ways to capture, develop, share, and utilizing the knowledge. It is a multidisciplinary approach being considered in library sciences, business administration, and information systems etc. Knowledge management is the integral part of library from acquisition to its retrieval by the knowledge seeker/user. This paper focuses over the various perspectives and approaches of knowledge management. It will generalize the role of knowledge management in libraries. It will through light over the various aspects for which knowledge management is needed in the libraries. The procedure of managing knowledge in the library has also been discussed in brief. Keywords:Knowledge,Multidisciplinary,Information, Perspectives INTRODUCTION: (Lee, 2005). (Laurent, 2010) has described the KM is a process that helps organizations finds, two approaches of KM as incremental and select, organize, disseminate, and transfer global. The first begins from specific problem important information and expertise necessary solving. Knowledge relative to problem solving for activities (Gupta, Iyer & Aronson, 2000). can be reused for other activities such as (Bell, 175) defines knowledge as “a set of training, design improvement or innovation. In organized statements of facts or ideas, the second approach, the involvement of top- presenting a reasoned judgment or an management and stakeholders is vital for the experimental result, which is transmitted to success of the global strategy. Knowledge is others through some communication medium in predictive and future oriented, which guides for some systematic form. Knowledge management future planning and actions, while information is can be broadly divided into two types i.e. tactic only organised data in a meaningful milieu. knowledge and explicit knowledge. Explicit Knowledge is a form of information, which can knowledge is described as documented or exist only within an individual’s mind and KM codified knowledge while tacit knowledge is captures this tacit knowledge that people hold non-documented or non codified one. Explicit with them. It, being subjective, cannot be knowledge may be shared among others while directly transferred or communicated from one tactic knowledge is highly personalized and may person to another and needs to be converted into be gained through personal experience. This is information first. Information can then be the basic difference between tactic and explicit regarded as the objective and therefore knowledge. The captured knowledge should be communicable and recordable form of organized using indexing, cataloguing, filtering, knowledge. Academic libraries and their codifying etc. for its easy access and retrieval. associated institutions can work in close Then knowledge should be refined, and relationship to collaborate, share and disseminated or transferred to the concerned disseminate knowledge. Similarly, librarians can people for effective use (Roknuzzaman, Kanai & liaise with their customers to select appropriate Umemoto, 2009). information resources and organise them in most (Wiig, 1997) has described the importance of accessible way to make them readily available managing the knowledge as to become when required. These information resources are competitive and successful, experience shows instruments to satisfy customer knowledge that enterprises must create and sustain a craving. This partnership of librarians and balanced intellectual capital portfolio. They need academia will transform librarians’ status from to set broad priorities and integrate the goals of service oriented to value oriented (Jain, 2006). managing intellectual capital and the KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT corresponding effective knowledge processes. PERSPECTIVES: As a learning organization, libraries should Knowledge management focuses over the provide a strong leadership in knowledge aspects like competitive advantage, innovation, management. Unlike those business integration, learning and improved performance. organizations whose goal for knowledge It may be taken as a strategic asset which affects management is for competitive advantage, most the overall performance of any organisation. public, academic, and research libraries, with the Elena describes the three aspects in KM process exception of company libraries (which may be as data management, IT management and known or called corporate libraries, special strategic use of IT and KM technologies. libraries, or knowledge centres), have a different Integration among these three will define the orientation and value. Instead of competition, application of KM concept in the libraries or internal use only, and little sharing of knowledge organisation. Through data management the data with others outside, the most important mission is managed through repositories and a required of public, academic, and research libraries is to database is maintained. In the present era expand the access of knowledge for their users technologies play a significant role in getting the

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 data organised and classified in a systematic also provided through the libraries to the manner. IT is to be inculcated at every step of seekers. These may be provided instantly to the KM i.e. collecting the data, its organisation and research scholars, professors etc. In the present classification. The disposal of data may also be era of latest technologies, library has also done through the use of information become a technology centric concept. To make technologies. Both IT and KM must be the knowledge available to everyone in the least implemented strategically so as the interested possible time and economically, the parties may get the desired information for its digitalization of libraries has been done. optimal utilization. Cristea & Capatina have Information system software is used to concluded that knowledge is not present only in generalize the knowledge and present it on the mind of the people, but also in the demand. Digital libraries have gone for LAN to connections (links) between them. As a get the data sharing over a limited accessible representation of this network, the collective area. Only the authorised persons are allowed to mind will be formed, which represents the core access the information over LAN. The overall of organizational knowledge management. They knowledge management in the library is done also discussed the perspectives of KM given by through OPAC. Open Public Access Catalogue Krogh and Roos which were employees, (OPAC) module is used in libraries for communication, organizational structure, links cataloguing the information. Knowledge between members and management of human management in libraries is done through two resources. Christensen, & Bukh have discussed broad procedures. Firstly, the knowledge is the two perspectives of knowledge management managed in the form of documents. It is the as artefact oriented perspective and the process physical aspect of the knowledge management. oriented perspective. Artefact perspective Secondly, the knowledge may also be in digital basically focuses over information technology form. IT in libraries has become an indispensible and the ways in which technology may be part. It has become a basic requirement to applied for the codification of knowledge. manage a large depository of knowledge in the Knowledge management is therefore mostly library. The term e-library is used very common based on collecting, storing and distributing because the seeker may not be able to present knowledge. While process oriented knowledge physically in all the libraries. So the rich and focuses the process in which knowledge is reputed libraries are providing e-library portals created and not on the documents or the rules, to their users. (Wani, 2010) in his research paper based on the process. This implies that has contributed the concept of web based continuous and dynamic adaptation to ‘real life’ knowledge systems in libraries. According to takes place. (Staudt, 2003) has described two him the components of knowledge management perspectives of knowledge management i.e. are human resource management, financial codification and personalization for the management, knowledge resource management, professional needs. Codification will produce interoperability (among two terminals), efficiencies repetitive work that can benefit from information retrieval tools and the Meta data. automated document assembly. While He has described four steps of knowledge personalization, as a knowledge management management in web based systems as goal, will help to deliver a good list of knowledge capture, knowledge organization, experienced young lawyers/professionals to staff knowledge filtration and knowledge a new engagement even if the firm’s personnel preservation. assets become too large to hold in his own A brief procedure of managing the documents memory. in library has been described below. KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN Acquisition committee issues the supply order of LIBRARIES: the document on the recommendation of the Library may be considered as a warehouse of concerned authoritariate. After receiving the knowledge. It is a place where knowledge is order, the documents are accessioned in the stored in an organised and classified manner Accession Register. Then they are forwarded to which may be easily retrieved when required. the Technical section. There documents are Academic libraries are information centres classified and a call number is provided to the established in support of the mission of their documents which includes the class number and parent institutions to generate knowledge, and the book number. Then cataloguing of the people equipped with knowledge in order to documents is done either manually or direct serve the society and advance the well-being of entry is made in OPAC. Catalogue cards are mankind (Raja, Ahmad & Sinha, 2009). But prepared as per Author, Title and Subject managing knowledge is not an easy task. A well according to the catalogue code followed by the defined procedure is followed for managing the library. The catalogue cards are arranged in knowledge. In libraries it is recorded in form of order. A label of call number is pasted over the books, journals, magazines, newspapers, DVDs spine of the document. Then documents are sent & CDs, e-books, e-journals, charts etc. It is the to the stack area where they are arranged responsibility of the librarian to preserve the according to call number. User may get the call knowledge in best condition and disseminate it number of the required document from the to the information seeker. Reference services are catalogue and get the document with the help of

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 the call number. Through the circulation section slots for searching any document or he may get the document issued. article. NEED FOR KNOWLEDGE CONCLUSION: MANAGEMENT IN LIBRARIES: Librarians deserve a central role in the We have gone through the concept and various development of processes and policies that perspectives of knowledge management. The harness an organization’s knowledge base. As two basic ways of knowledge management have keepers and disseminators of information within also been discussed. Now the major question organization, librarians make substantial arises that what is the need for this knowledge contributions to the successful implementation management? of knowledge management projects. There is an To create the knowledge repositories: The incredible increase in qualitative management of term repository is used to define a storage knowledge in libraries so as to serve the seeker location. In libraries a repository of knowledge in the most optimal way. Through a structurized is maintained in form of documents and in management of knowledge in the libraries a lot digitalized form. A well defined cataloguing is of benefits may be availed like reduced done so as to classify the material to ease the transaction time, less efforts, knowledge access. This knowledge repository is like a environment etc. Nowadays various web based knowledge database where documented and knowledge management technologies are also digitalized knowledge is managed to serve the available in the market so as to create a well seeker. organised knowledge environment. A flood of For effortless access to required documents and information may be managed knowledge: Through maintaining a with the help of them for an effective knowledge systematic repository of knowledge, it management in the libraries. becomes easy to access the required REFERENCES: knowledge on demand. A detailed 1. Bell, Daniel. (1997). The Coming of procedure is followed in both Post-industrial Society: A Venture in documented and digitalized knowledge Social Forecasting. New York: Basic so as to classify it according to call no. Books Through call no. provided to the books 2. Christensen, K. S., & Bukh, P. N. or digital material in OPAC they may be (2009). Knowledge Management in traced easily with least efforts. Perspectives: An Analysis of Project To facilitate the dissemination of Management in Two Companies. knowledge: The basic function of a Working Paper series: AALBORG library is to make the knowledge University 7, Retrieved October 04, available to the user. It helps in delivery 2014 from of knowledge to the seeker and provides http://www2.business.aau.dk/digitalAsse them the opportunities to use that ts/52/52570_11.pdf knowledge in the best possible way. 3. Cristea, D. S., & Capatina, A. (2009). Various steps of knowledge Perspectives on knowledge management management in the libraries are headed models. Economics and applied towards its proper dissemination to its informatics,XV (2), 355-366. Retrieved ultimate user. It facilitates person-to- from person knowledge transfer. http://www.ann.ugal.ro/eco/Doc2009_2/ Create a well structured knowledge Cristea_Capatina.pdf environment: A knowledge 4. Elena, V. V. (n.d.). Dimensions and environment refers to the whole perspectives for knowledge ecosystem supporting a knowledge Management and information. Journal domain. A rich knowledge environment of Knowledge Management, Economics will facilitate the flow of information and Information Technology, 1-6. and knowledge from documents and Retrieved October 03, 2014 from database to the ultimate users. This will http://www.scientificpapers.org/wp- also facilitate an integrated & content/files/1126_Dimensions_and_per collaborative knowledge sharing spectives_for_knowledge_management_ atmosphere. and_information.pdf Toserve the users in best possible 5. Gupta, B., Iyer, L.S., & Aronson, J.E. time: Timely access is the priority in (2000). Knowledge management: today’s hustle lives. No one wants to practices and challenges. Industrial wait. Like quality service time is also a Management + Data very important element of service Systems (UK)100(1), 17-22 delivery. So to ensure the timely 6. Jain, P. (2007). An empirical study of delivery of knowledge the documents knowledge management in academic and data must be managed in a best libraries in East and Southern Africa. versed way so as the user may access it Library Review,56(5), 377 – 392. Doi: on demand in the least possible time. A 10.1108/00242530710750572 proper cataloguing reduces the time

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 7. Javeed Ahmad Rah, J. A., Gul, S., & and Positions. ICAL 2009 – POSTER Wani, Z. A. (2010). University libraries: PAPER, 701-704. Retrieved October 04, step towards a web based knowledge 2014 from management system. VINE, 40(1), 24 – http://crl.du.ac.in/ical09/papers/index_fil 38. Doi: 10.1108/03055721011024900 es/ical-124_198_418_2_RV.pdf 8. Karl M. W. (1997). Knowledge 12. Staudt, R. W. (2003). Perspectives of Management: An Introduction and knowledge management in law firms.” Perspective. Journal of Knowledge LexisNixis, Retrieved October 04, 2014 Management, 1(1), 6 – 14 from 9. Laurent, E. M. (2010). Knowledge https://www.lexisnexis.com/presscenter/ management: French cooking. VINE, hottopics/kminfirms.pdf 40(3/4), 301 -311. Doi: 13. Wee-Lee, H. (2005). Knowledge 10.1108/03055721011071421 Management and the Role of Libraries. 10. Md. Roknuzzaman, Kanai, H., & The 3rd China-US Library Conference, Umemoto, K. (2009). Integration of Retrieved October 04, 2014 from knowledge management process into http://www.white- digital library system. Library Review, 58(5), 372 – 386. Doi: 10.1108/00242530910961792 11. Raja, W., Ahmad, Z, & Sinha, A.K. (2009). Knowledge Management and Academic Libraries in IT Era: Problems

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR: CONCEPT AND RELEVANCE

Dr. Madhu Gupta 117 C, MayurVihar, Phase II, Delhi-110091

Abhishek House No.860, Sector 22-B, Gurgaon-122015

ABSTRACT: People behave a certain way in an organization environment. There are many factors affect job performance, employee interaction, job commitment, leadership and managerial styles. Individuals have studied this very topic for decades in order to find ways of increasing organizational performance. This article describes organizational behavior is the study of both group and individual performance and activity within an organization. Keywords:Organisational Behaviour,Factor,Motivation Organizational behavior (OB) is a term relate to Trail Theory: It assumes that there is a common the study of individual and group dynamics in an set of traits on which individual can be organizational setting, as the nature of the compared such as extroverts and introverts. organizations themselves. Whenever people Psycho-analysis Theory: It emphasizes the interact in organizations, many factors come into contribution of the “unconscious” as a play. The subject of Organizational Studies component of personality, which motivates a attempts to understand and model these factors. variety of behavior pattern. Propagated by This subject is becoming more important as Sigmund Freud (1973). Psycho-analysis theory people with diverse backgrounds and cultural holds that powerful unconscious biological values have to work together effectively and drives motivate human behavior and therefore efficiently. OB seeks to emphasize the people often find themselves in conflict with understanding of behavior in organizations so as social reality. to develop competencies in foreseeing how BehaviorismTheory: Behaviorism theory people are likely to behave. This knowledge may focuses on behavior that can be measured, and then help in controlling those behaviors that are recorded. It looks for the immediate, observable not befitting the objectives of the organizations. factors that cause a particular behavior. Factors like objectivity, reliability and Understanding what causes certain behavior sustainability are important while selecting the pattern can assist managers to generate methods for this purpose. Questionnaire, conditions that would reinforce desirable work interview, simulation are important while behavior or eliminate undesirable work selecting the methods for this purpose. behavior. Questionnaire, interview, simulation and survey Humanistic Theory: It emphasizes the are generally used to elicit personalities affect importance of individual growth, improvement the nature of their responses. and self-concept to personality. It maintains that As understanding personality is crucial for human nature is either neutral or good and any knowing behavior of an individual in an bad characteristics are result of damages that organization. It refers to some qualities, might have been inflicted on the developing characteristics skills and competencies of individual. It assumes that people have the individuals along with certain other traits like potential for positive development, creativity, grooming and attitude. Personality means very and self-realization. specific patterns of behavior of an individual in a Measuring Personality: Since personality of an defined situation. But there are certain uniform individual plays a crucial role in shaping an characteristics, which always emerge in a person organization, several methods have been evolved on the basis of which certain inferences can be to measure personality. By and large three drawn. Examples could be dominant or methods of assessment are being used. These are submissive nature, aggressiveness or politeness. Personality Inventories, Projective Tests and Personality consists of organization of feelings, Assessment Centre. Let us now briefly discuss thoughts, cognitions and visible behavior. each method. However certain patterns of behavior are not Personality Inventories: As a widely used of visible and are known only after proper testing. measuring personality, it consists of several Let us therefore discuss how to measure statements related with a specific dimensions of personality. personality and individuals are asked to indicate A number of theories of personality developed their degree of agreement or disagreement. This to study individual personality have been is usually done by asking both and positively proposed. We will now discuss some of these worded statements on selected common themes. theories. Projective Tests: This test is conducted to investigate more difficult and sophisticated aspects of an individual’s personality. The

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 assumptions is that some of the dormant  the self-actualization or self-fulfillment fantasies, feelings, hopes and aspirations can be needs to achieve the potential within measured to asses a personality. The test consists him. of ten pictures; one half being the same as other Motivation: Improving Factors: there are half. These are ambiguous, unstructured inkblots several ways in which motivation level of and the individuals are asked to indicate what employees can be augmented and improved. they see in these pictures. Another projective Some of these factors are described as: method is the thematic appreciation, which was Job Enrichment: Jobs must be redesigned to developed by Morgan and Murray in 1935 and provide opportunities for achievement, consists twenty pictures each represents a social recognition, responsibility and growth. It setting. These pictures provide a relatively comprises of variety in work contents, greater defined situations and the individuals is asked to use of skills and opportunity for growth by write a story of what might be happening in that providing employee with a complete unit of social situation. work and increased authority. Assessment Centre: This test consists of a Flexi Time: the concept of flexi time is designed variety of methods used to evaluate the to provide employees some control on their personality of employees in organizations. It work schedule. Entire work time is divided into may consist of situational tests, management “core time” and “Flexi Time. During core time, problems, in-basket exercises, business plan all employees are compulsorily present while presentations, letter and memo writing etc. It is during flexi time they are free to choose their followed by developing behavior categories to own timings. assess the performance on the key result areas. Empowerment: Empowerment essentially The dimensions assessed are means providing authority to employees in their personality characteristics such as sensitivity to area of operation for resolving their work related others, career ambition, integrity, independence problems with out seeking approval from above. etc. Quality Circles: Quality circles are semi Most OB strategies is are eventually meant to autonomous work groups which meet regularly optimally utilize the capabilities of individuals to discuss and solve problems related to their and groups towards achievement of specific are which aims at improving working organizational objectives. The performance of an conditions and self development. individual is a function of his or her ability and Employees Stock Ownership Plan: It has willingness or desire to use one’s ability to become a major tool in retaining and motivating achieve certain goals. However, it is important employees in business organizations. It is an that staff is adequately motivated to fulfill these Organization’s established benefit plan in which objectives. Once a manager is able to understand employees are offered company stock as part of the traits of personality of an individual worker, their benefit package. It makes employees work he can use different methods of motivation. A harder as it directly affects the performance of brief description of motivation is given here. the company and the value of their work also Work Motivation: Motivation is a process that raises. starts with physiological or psychological urge Work motivation and job satisfaction are closely or need. It activates a behavior or a drive that is linked with the overall performance of workers aimed at a goal or incentive. All individuals and subsequent rewards. A well motivated have a number of basic needs, which can be employee is likely to feel more satisfied and thought as outlets that channel and regulate the vice-versa. Hence, it is essential to understand flow of potential energy from the reservoir. Most the relationship between these concepts so as to individuals have, within a given socio-cultural apply them in the day to day management for system, a similar set of motives or energy better performance. outlets; but differ greatly in the relative strength Job Satisfaction and Reward Management: or readiness of various motives and actualization Job satisfaction can be defined as an individual’s of motives depends on specific situations in overall attitude towards his or her job. It is a which a person finds himself or herself. positive state resulting from the appraisal of There are several theories to identify certain once job or job experience. It is regarded both as motives that play an important role in a general attitude as well as satisfaction with determining individual and group performance. specific dimensions of the job such as pay, the Maslow (1954) has identified five basic needs. work itself, promotion opportunities, supervision, co-workers etc. The degree of  the physiological needs such as hunger satisfaction may vary with how well outcomes thirst and sex fulfill or exceed expectations.  the safety needs for protection against There are various theories of job satisfaction. danger, threat and deprivation The human relations movement suggested that  the love needs for satisfactory real satisfaction with job could only be provided association with others, for belonging to by allowing individuals enough responsibility groups etc. and freedom to enable them to grow mentally  the esteem needs for self respect, ego or while physical/economic school emphasized the status need role of the physical agreement of work, physical

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 working conditions and pay. In recent years, the creativity among employees and better mental attitude of job satisfaction has come to be linked health. with broader approach to improve the job Effective Reward Management: Employee design, work organization and quality of life. recognition is a communication tool that Measuring job satisfaction has been a reinforces and rewards the most important challenging process to managers. Several outcomes people create for your organization. techniques have been developed over the years, When you recognize people effectively, you which are used extensively and are of great reinforce, with your chosen means of importance for practitioners. For instance recognition, the actions and behaviors you must individuals are made to recall some of the want to see people repeat. An effective important and critical incidents, which have employee recognition system is simple, caused satisfaction or dissatisfaction to them and immediate, and powerful tool. When you conclusions, are drawn from such exercises. In consider employee recognition processes, you another method a small group of employees are need to develop recognition that is equally brought together and encouraged to openly share powerful for both the organization and the their feeling regarding their job. In group employee. environment people feel free to talk about Reward and recognition that help both the various things. Researchers have identified employer and the employee get what they need several factors leading to job satisfaction, which from work are a win-win situation. Avoid are broadly divided into two categories, namely, employee recognition system that Singles out a Organisational factors and Individual few employees who are mysteriously selected Determinants. for the recognition, Saps the morale of the many ORGANIZATIONAL FACTORS: who failed to understand the criteria enough to Reward System: the organizational reward complete and win, and Seeks votes or other system has been found to be related to job personalized, subjective criteria to determine satisfaction. This pertains to how fairy pay winner. benefits and promotions are distributed. Work: The nature of work contributes heavily. The factors such as flexibility, freedom and REFERENCES: discretion available in the performance of one’s 1. Hersey, P. and Blanchard, K. H. job bring a lot of job satisfaction. Management of organizational behavior. Supervisory Behaviour: satisfaction tends to be 5th ed. Eaglewood Cliffs: NJ Prentice- higher when employees believe that their Hall, 1988. supervisor is competent and considerate. 2. Malini, V. Job commitment of women Working Conditions: overall working executive. Management and Labour conditions in an organization have a direct Studies 26(4) 1990, pp247-257 bearing on the level of satisfaction, comfort, 3. Maslow, A. theory of human motivation. salary challenge and resource availability are Psychological Review 50, 1954, pp370- main components of working conditions. 396 Individual Factors: Various individual and 4. Morgan, C.D. and Murray, H.A. a socio-economic variables are linked to job method of investigating fantasies: the satisfaction. Researchers have found that thematic appreciation test. Archives of younger people are more satisfied. Similarly Neurological Psychology 34, 1935, men are more influenced than women if they are pp370-396 provided more autonomy in their work. There is 5. Weber, Max . The theory of social and direct link between job satisfaction and economic organization Ed. By A. H. performance of an employee. A satisfied worker Henderson and TalcottParsons. Gelenco, makes extra efforts leading to better Free Press, 1924. performance in his or her work. There is higher 6. http://www.investopedia.com/terms/o/or outcome in an organization if employees are ganisational-behaviour.asp more satisfied in their jobs. It also leads to

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 QUEST FOR IDENTITY INMANJU KAPUR’S DIFFICULT DAUGHTERS

Dr. Geeta Gupta Asst. Prof. in English Aggarwal College Ballabgarh

ABSTRACT: Fiction, the most powerful form of literary expression, has acquired a prestigious portion in the Indo- English Literature. It is in fact the latest of literary form to be evolved and the most dominant in 20th Century. Indian Creative Writers in English have been attracted to adopt this form generously and skillfully. Fiction by women writers contributes a major segment of the contemporary Indian writing in English. It provides insight, a wealth of understanding, a reservoir of meaning and a basis of discussion. They have heralded new consciousness, particularly the pathetic plight of the Indian Women. Manju Kapur’s debut novel Difficult Daughters won her international acclaim and common wealth prize for the best first book (Eurasia) published in 1998. Manju Kapur is a professor of English Literature at Miranda House College, New Delhi. Kapur has taken profound insight into woman’s inner turmoil to find a place, an identity and individuality of her own in society. For centuries, women are always back staged by patriarchal world. Literature and art - and scriptures too – consider women as a meek and docile creature. One who appears to be against this ideological of a framework of a feminine is considered as immoral. In Difficult Daughters, Kapur’s Protagonist Virmati, an educated middle class girl expounds her rebellious ideas against this male-dominated society and tries to gain her identity. The present paper highlights the journey of inner self of Virmati and her struggle for identity. Fiction, the most powerful form of literary self. expression, has acquired a prestigious portion in Difficult Daughters stresses on the woman’s the Indo-English Literature. It is in fact the latest need for self-fulfillment autonomy, self- of literary form to be evolved and the most realization, independence individuality and self- dominant in 20th Century. Indian Creative actualization. Located primarily in the India of Writers in English have been attracted to adopt the 1940’s, Manju Kapur speaks of the idea of this form generously and skillfully. Fiction by independence – independence aspired to and women writers contributes a major segment of obtained by a nation and independence yearned the contemporary Indian writing in English. It after by a woman. Among the writers who have provides insight, a wealth of understanding, a portrayed the ‘new woman’ who is inclined to reservoir of meaning and a basis of discussion. take the ‘road not taken’, and walking on their Women writers like R.P. Jhabvala, Nayantara ‘own road’, Manju Kapur undoubtedly arrests Sahgal, Kamala Markandaya, Anita Desai, attention. Kapur says that she is interested in the Shashi Deshpande, Arundhati Roy, Shobha De, lives of women, whether in the political arena or Bharti Mukherjee, Jhumpa Lahiri and Manju in domestic spaces. One of the main Kapoor have heralded new consciousness, preoccupations in all her books is how women particularly the pathetic plight of the Indian manage to negotiate both inner and outer spaces Women. In the realm of fiction, they are in their lives – what sacrifices do they have to progressing by leaps and bounds. make in order to keep the home fires burning Manju Kapur’s debut novel Difficult Daughters and at what cost to their personal lives do they won her international acclaim and common find some kind of fulfillment outside the home. wealth prize for the best first book (Eurasia) Difficult Daughters represents the emergence of published in 1998. Manju Kapur is a professor new woman who is no longer the “chaste wife of English Literature at Miranda House College, whose suffering can only make her more New Delhi. As a woman writer she says that she virtuous, the nurturing mother who denies her writes in a female voice because she knows no own self, the avenging Kali or a titillating other voice. She received her education in India strumpet”. Based partially on the life of Kapur’s and abroad. She is an avid reader and a widely own mother, the novel movingly evokes the travelled person. By projecting journey as motif, multiple frustrations encountered by the central Kapur has taken profound insight into woman’s character, Virmati, in her efforts to educate inner turmoil to find a place, an identity and herself and establish a domestic space, she can individuality of her own in society. For call home. Born in Amritsar in Punjab in 1940, centuries, women are always back staged by Virmati, the daughter of a father of progressive patriarchal world. Literature and art - and ideas and a traditionalist mother seeks human scriptures too – consider women as a meek and relations that would allow her to be herself. Her docile creature. One who appears to be against desire for self expression and self realization is this ideological of a framework of a feminine is condemned to failure by her own family as well considered as immoral. In Difficult Daughters, as that of the man she marries. Through Kapur’s Protagonist Virmati, an educated middle Virmati’s character, Manju Kapur has dealt with class girl expounds her rebellious ideas against the theme of travails in self-identity vis-à-vis this male-dominated society and tries to gain her socio-cultural identity. identity. She experiences a journey to her inner Difficult Daughters, set against the bloody

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 backdrop of partition in the cities of Amritsar baby, feeding in the mother’s arms, Kasturi and Lahore, remains a powerful portrait of a would get irritated and push her away. ‘Have society where shame is more important than you seen to their food – milk – clothes – grief; the novel spans three generations of studies?’ . . . ‘I am just going’, protest Virmati women and unveils their sense of finally. ‘Why can’t Indumati also take disillusionment. The three generation of women responsibility? Why does it always have to be (Kasturi, Virmati and Ida) symbolize the three me?’ ‘You know they don’t listen to her’, stages of Indian independence. Kasturi, the snapped Kasturi. ‘You are the eldest. If you mother represents the preindependence and is don’t see to things, who will?’ shown as a victim of the offensive control of A constant sufferer Virmati, nurses a desire of patriarchy. In the beginning, Kasturi is being being as independent, defiant and assertive as presented as an epitome of motherhood who her cousin Shakuntala. Shakuntala sows the bears pain and suffering. “Kasturi could not seeds of freedom in Virmati. She symbolizes remember a time when she was not tired, when modernity as not following the conventional her feet and legs did not ache”. Through these norms which limits daughter to an early three female protagonists, Manju Kapur has marriage and then home and family. She revealed the life circle of a woman who is encourages her for independence and for equal devoted from beginning of her life. As a child, a rights for women, thus epitomizing the post girl has to do domestic, house hold activities [as colonial emancipated ‘New Woman’. New Virmati does], after marriage, she has to bear woman breaks the customs of the tradition pain to give birth to child [as Kasturi’s condition bound society. Both Shakuntala and Virmati is revealed after having 11 children] and after come out of this ideological framework of being being mother, her whole life is dedicated to her typical Indian woman. Shakuntala takes part in whole family. A very pointed statement brings the political Gandhian movement whereas attention: “How trapped could nature make a Kasturi’s ideology is confined to patriarchy and woman?” Virmati, the daughter, symbolizes the she thinks ‘marriage’ as the duty of every girl country’s struggle for independence on macro rather than studies. She remarks – “Hai re, beti! level. Psychologically, she reveals her rebellious What is need to do a job? A woman’s shaan is in nature against deep-rooted conventions of her home. Now you have studied and worked morality especially for a girl. She undertakes her enough Shaadi. After you get married, Viru can journey to the path leading to one’s individuality follow.’ For Kasturi, Education means but to her, it leaves in the midway with no developing the mind for the benefit of the family achievement. But her image is of a woman and nothing more than that. But Shakuntala, like unfettered. new woman, shares her view with Virmati: Ida, Virmati’s daughter is the product of post “These people don’t really understand Viru . . . independence era and establishes herself as an women are still supposed to marry and nothing independent woman. She starts her journey to else”. Lajwanti and Kasturi, on the opposite, get find an insight into her mother’s past, denies her into clash with Shakuntala’s ideas. They behold and revolts against the ways and follies. The the stereotypical opinion that only a man is free opening line reveals her anguish: to do a job, to go outside and to do his desired “The one thing I had wanted was not to be like task whereas a girl has to take every step my mother. Now she was gone and I started at according to the norms of society. She does not the fire that rose from her shriveled body, dry- have her own life. Virmati feels influential eyed, leaden, half dead myself, while my impact of Shakuntala and at once blurts: ‘I want relatives clustered around the pyre and wept.” to be like you, Pehnji . . . I wish I too could do The novel traces Virmati’s quest for freedom things. But I am not clever’. Virmati comes to and identity, her desperation for a space of her know about her inner desire to find a self own to study. Her desire to shed the surrogate identity. So it was now useless looking for motherhood, imposed on her. Being the eldest answers inside the home. One had to look daughter she is burdened with family duties outside to education, freedom and the bright because of her mother’s incessant pregnancies. lights of Lahore colleges. Thus, Shakuntala’s The girls: Virmati, Indumati, Gunvati, visit plants the seeds of aspiration in Virmati, Hemavati, Vidyavati and Parvati. The boys: seeds to find her true place in society. Kailashnath, Gopinath, Krishnanath, Family, the fundamental unit of society, can be Parkashnath and Hiranath. “Ever since Virmati seen as perpetrating the larger patriarchal power could remember she had been looking after structure. The institution of marriage makes children. It wasn’t only baby Parvati to whom woman an object of barter and subverts the right she was indispensable; to her younger siblings of woman to name children after the man. In this she was second mother as well”. The one cause way, an entire sex lost its identity, in terms of for Virmati’s frustration was her mother’s socio-political and economic position and was continuous breeding. Virmati was never vulnerable to exploitation. Virmati, in the novel, remained free. At times Virmati yearned for rejects both institutions family and marriage. affection, for some sign that she was special. But She rebels against stereotypical ideas provoking – the honour of family relating to daughter. She “. . . When she put her head next to the youngest goes against her family’s will of arrange

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 marriage with an engineer, Inderjit and falls in house. love with a Professor, Harish who is already There is an unresolved dichotomy in the married, first appears in her life as her parent’s character portrayal of Virmati, the female tenant. The Professor was married as a child to protagonist.While she is strong willed so as to an illiterate woman, whom he had tried to resist all kinds of social and family pressure, she educate and had miserably failed. By giving the is not strong enough to stay away from educated Virmati an advantage over an illiterate professor’s influence. Perhaps, lack of maternal Ganga, Kapur highlights the importance of love and loss of familial affection, explains the female education and the adverse effects of child protagonist’s weakness. She needed love and marriage in this modern world. Like Shakuntala, identity but missed it. The professor symbolized Virmati herself demands to go to Lahore for the only hope of fulfilling this need and further studies. Kasturi is shocked to see this achieving the desired identity. It could be transformation in Virmati. Kasturi curses her by possible that she was in love with the concept of saying: “God has put you on earth to punish love rather than the professor. Thus Virmati is me”. In Lahore, Virmati, like Shakuntala, finds an example of feminine suffering. This suffering ‘autonomy’ and ‘freedom’. Here, she is also is also largely due to the individual awareness in under the impact of Swarnalata who is an ultra a conservative community, becoming a outcaste committed feminist and who takes her to a in the family as if in exile, due to a woman’s meeting in Punjab Women’s Students rejection of the mythical model of an ideal Conference where she, after listening to her daughter. speech joins a combat in her mind. She feels – The title Difficult Daughters, perhaps, is a “Am I free, thought Virmati? I came here to be pointer to the message that a woman, who tries free, but I am not like these women. They are to forge a self identity impelled by her unique using their minds, organizing, participating in needs, is branded a difficult daughter by the conferences, politically active, while my time is family and the society. Ida, the narrator of the spent being in love. She felt out of place, an novel states at the very outset the one thing she outcaste amongst all these women. She thought has wanted, she was not to be like her mother of Harish who loved her. She must be satisfied and in the end, after having traced her mother’s with that”. legacy, asks it to haunt her no more. Though, at Harish comes to meet her in Lahore. They meet the center of the narrative we see a woman who and enjoy their life. Virmati, gets pregnant. Then fights, but falls and fails, Kapur’s novel shows she goes to Amritsar and manages a gold bangle that what happens to Virmati is the from her father but only to sell it for abortion. representative destiny of Indian woman. Harish enjoys with her but he neither takes the However, Gur Pyari Jandial correctly points out responsibility of the child nor the abortion. After that it is a mistake to devalue Virmati’s struggle this depressing incident, she decides not to just because she failed, for what mattered was to entertain the Professor any more. She goes to have made the attempt, “to break the patriarchal Siramaur, a hill station in Nahan to become a mould, and for Virmati to have tried to do that in principal in Pratibha Kanya Vidyalaya. Virmati the forties was a great achievement.Unlike enjoys a free life here like a bee and tastes the Swarna Late, her cousin Sakuntala and even her honey of life here; her quest for identity was daughter Ida,Virmati fails to earn a recognition satisfying. She has to exercise her in the society but she must be applauded for her responsibilities entirely by herself. In the micro- valiant struggle against patriarchy and state she has no family or close friends. She colonialism throughout the novel. Kapur’s attains a near exemplary level of female- message is loud and clear that “society would be autonomy. For the first and only time, she has better off if its females were effective and her own place to live, like Virginia Woolfs capable”. famous ‘room of one’s own’ and yet she falls. REFERENCES: Harish comes to meet her in Nahan. They meet 1. Jandial, Gur Pyari. Manju Kapur’s secretly in Virmati’s room in the dark night. But Difficult Daughters: A Study of this news flatters in the air, and Virmati loses her Transition from chaos to integration. employees’ confidence and leaves the job. The Common Wealth Review vol.12 no. She still has another option Shantiniketan, where 1, 2000-2001. she decides to go. She could have remade her 2. Kalpana, R.J. Feminism and Family. life and maintained her identity and New Delhi: Prestige Books. 2005. independence if she could have succeeded in this 3. Kapur, Manju. Difficult Daughters. journey. Unfortunately, she has to change the London: Faber and Faber, 1998. train in Delhi and she contacts a friend of Harish 4. Kumar, Dr. Ashok. Novels of Manju and her dreams of a spiritual awakening, of a Kapur – A feministic study, New Delhi: renewed autonomy fades. She marries Harish; Sarup & Sons, 2010 she is unwelcomed by Harish’s family members. 5. Prasad, Amar Nath, Indian Women His mother and wife Ganga compel Virmati to Writing in English: New Perspective. lead a suffocating life in the tight walls of the New Delhi: Sarup & Sons. 2005.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

SAARC : ORIGIN, GROWTH, PROBLEMS AND PROSPECTS

Kalyan Singh Assistant Professor Dept. of Political Science, Dronacharya Govt. College, Gurgaon (HR) Email : [email protected]

ABSTRACT: We have entered global era of 21st century, is a new phenomenon, in the sense of optimism prevails for attaining peace building and prosperity through effective role of SAARC. The SAARC was established on 8 Dec., 1985 in Dhaka. Thereby has been announced the vision of cooperation in different areas. Because South Asian countries are facing many of problems like inflation poverty, starvation and unemployment. It was decided unanimously to gain the regional cooperation, mutual benefits for promoting economic development. They accepted to keep a meeting in a year for their future projects to review the progress of SAARC. The SAARC summits were held at proper time but after some time, some problems appeared before us because of it, the regional cooperation, development and vision was effected. It has been described in the research paper emerging trends , aims, objectives , problems and prospects of SAARC Keywords: Regionalism, Cooperation, Collective, Development, Problems, Prospects, SAARC. INTRODUCTION: the South Asian Association for Regional 5 The world today is at a turning point. The Cooperation (SAARC). According to SAARC changes that we are undergoing are global in Charter “In an increasingly inter dependent scope, revolutionary, fundamental and structural world, the objective of peace, freedom, social in content. As we have entered the 21st century justice and economic prosperity are best a sense of optimism prevails for attaining peace achieved in the South Asian region by fostering and prosperity through effective role of regional mutual understanding; good neighborly relation and global organization. and meaningful cooperation among the Regionalism as a means on consolidating Member States which are bound by ties of relation with the countries of a particular history and culture.” They decided to meet geographical area or like mind ones, to preserve annually. They held their some summits in and promote their common politico-strategic right time, but after 1987 some problems of the economics interests, gained momentum in member countries, which effected the regional South Asia immediately after the end of the cooperation. This paper is an Endeavour of find second World War a large number of Asian out the proper solution of some problem such as, countries secured independence from the what is the historical background of SAARC? clutches of their European masters. These What were the problems into SAARC countries were economically poor and socially Countries? What were the impacts of these backward. All of them had determined to problems into region? What was the prospect develop their societies in all respects and the of SAARC? What is the achievement of path towards progress was not that easy. Due to SAARC? a number of interstate hostilities particularly HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF between India and Pakistan storming from the SAARC: paradoxical nature of the constituents and the The first concrete proposal for establishing a different and mutually incompatible external framework for regional cooperation in South military and security factors.2 The idea of Asia was made by the Late President of regional cooperation in South Asia first mooted Bangladesh , Zia-ur-Rehman, on May 2, 1980. by President Zia-ur-Rehman of Bangladesh in The idea of regional cooperation in South Asia 1980 at the time, when the South Asian was discussed in at least three conferences, the countries were Facing many problems like Asian Relations conference in New Delhi in inflation, poverty starvation and unemployment , April 1947, the Baguio Conference in the President Zia-ur-Rehman visited South Asian Philippines in May 1950, and the Colombo countries: India, Nepal, Sri Lanka, Bhutan, Powers Conference in April1954.Since 1977, the Maldives and Pakistan to discuss common Bangladesh President seemed to have been problems and prepare ground for cooperation at working on the idea of an ASEAN- like the regional level. organization in South Asia. During his visit to After consultation, the Foreign Secretaries of the India in December 1977, Zia- ur-Rehman seven countries met for the first time in discussed the issue of regional cooperation with Colombo in April, 1981. They decided to the New Indian Prime Minister, Morarji Desai. include only five areas of cooperation namely In the inaugural speech to the Colombo Plan agriculture, rural development, Consultative Committee (CPCC) which met in telecommunication, meteorology and health and Kathmandu in December 1977, King Birendra of population.4 The Head of States or Government Nepal gave a call for close regional cooperation held their first SAARC Summit in Dhaka on 7- among South Asian countries in sharing river 8 Dec. 1985 adopted charter formally establish waters. President Zia-ur-Rehaman welcomed

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 the King’s call during the former’s visit to 13-14, 1985, respectively to greater cooperation Bangladesh in January, 1978. President Zia ur and interdependence through regional Rehaman had also informally discussed the idea cooperation. These meetings reviewed the of regional cooperation with the leaders of South progress on already agreed area’s of Asian countries during the Commonwealth cooperation. However these meeting failed to Summit in Lusaka (1979) and the Non –Aligned reach on any major consensus due to the Summit in Havana (1979). However, the existence of some differences among the Bangladesh President seems to have given a member countries. The SAARC is an India concrete shape to the proposal after his visit to nation of regional cooperation among the Sri Lanka and discussion with the Sri Lankan countries of the region The scope of this President J.R. Jayawardene, in November 1979. regional cooperation is very vast for all the Several factors seem to have influenced countries of the region for their mutual regional President Zia-ur-Rehman’s thinking about cooperation. The countries of the region can establishing a regional organization in South achieve their objective of economic Asia during 1975-1979: (1) change in the development more cozily and speedily, if they political leadership in South Asian countries and begin the from themselves into a regional demonstration of accommodative diplomacy by economic group.11 The launching of SAARC on the new leaders; (2) Zia-ur-Rehman’s need for December 8, 1985 in Dhaka was the culmination Indian support to legitimize his coup d’ etat of five years efforts formulize regional regime; (3) an acute balance of payment crises cooperation in South Asia. At this Summit, of almost all South Asian countries which was South Asian Association for Regional further aggravated by the second oil crisis in Cooperation (SAARC) was formally launched 1979; (4) failure of the North- South dialogues, in place of SARC. The Dhaka Summit was the and increasing protectionism by the developed testimony of will and desire of the South Asian countries. countries to embark on the path of cooperation The idea of SAARC was initiated by the Late and collective development .12 The Late Indian President of Bangladesh, Zia-ur-Rehman on Prime Minister, Shri Rajive Gandhi said at this May 2, 1980. This gained momentum in the occasion that “we of the SAARC constitute one form of series of consultative meeting of fifth of the world population, cooperation Foreign Secretaries of the seven nations, was amongst us constitutes cooperation with in a held in Colombo, Sri Lanka on April 21-23, vast segment of humanity. SAARC cooperation 1981 which set the stage for further is an important stop to words realizing the comprehensive series of meeting by planning a largest Asian Consciousness.13” It was agreed source of action for regional cooperation. After that regional cooperation was mutually this, a series of meeting of the Foreign beneficial, desirable and necessary for Secretaries level were held in Nepal promoting economic development. (Kathmandu) November 2-4, 1981; Pakistan AIMS AND OBJECTIVE OF SAARC: (Islamabad) August 7-8, 1982, Bangladesh The South Asia Association for Regional (Dhaka) March 28-30, 1983 and India (Delhi) Cooperation (SAARC) comprising Afghanistan, July, 1983. These meetings proved a select Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, ground in formulating the conceptual framework Pakistan & Sri Lanka. It is a dynamic for regional cooperation.9 As scheduled the institutionalized regional cooperation in South first meeting of the Foreign Ministers level was Asia. Basically perceived as an economic held of New Delhi August 1-2, 1983 adopted grouping to work together for accelerating the the declaration on South Asian Regional place of socio-economic and cultural Cooperation (SARC) and formally launched development. SAARC is a manifestation of the the Integrated Programmer of Action (IPA) in determination of the people’s of South Asia to the five agreed areas of cooperation namely cooperate regionally and to work together agriculture rural development, towards finding solutions to their common telecommunication metrology, health and problems in a spirit of friendship, trust and population. The number of the areas included understanding based on mutual respect, equity in the Integrated Programme of Action (IPA) and shared benefits. The objectives of the has since grown considerably and new covers: association as defined in the SAARC Charter sports, arts, culture, postal services, terrorism, are : (1) to promote the welfare of the people of transport, education, scientific and technological South Asia and to improve their quality of life; collaboration, women and child development, (2) to accelerate economic growth, social suppression of terrorism, control of drugs abuse, progress and cultural development in the region environment, disaster management, food and to provide all individuals the opportunity to security, audio – visual exchanges etc.10 In joint live in dignity and to realize their full potential; Communiqué they agreed to meet at least once a (3) to promote and strengthen collective self- year and recommended their level at an reliance among the countries of South Asia; (4) appropriate time in order to review the progress to contribute to develop mutual trust of SARC. understanding and appreciation of one another’s The second meeting of SAARC countries problem; (5) to promote active collaboration and Foreign Ministers held at Male in July 10-11, mutual assistance in the economic, several, 1984 and third meeting held at Thimpu in May cultural, technical and scientific fields; (6) to

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 strengthen cooperation with other developing campus in southern Bhutan in mid 1990. Those countries; (7) to strengthen cooperation among were finally dismantled by Bhutan in 2003. themselves in international forums on matters of Thus , close and cordial India – Bhutan bilateral common interest; and (8) to cooperate with relations did not result in absence of security international and regional organization with concerns .20 Problems with Bangladesh was Tim similar aims and purposes. Cooperation in the Bigha Galiyara and dispute of Ganga water at SAARC is based on respect for the principles of Farakha effected their relation which was Sovereign equality, territorial integrity, political resolved in 1992 and 1996.21 India –Pakistan independence, non-interference in internal disputes and terror activity from the soil of affairs of the member states and mutual benefit. Pakistan effected the process of SAARC. Regional cooperation is seen as a complement to Pakistan attacked on Kargil Mountain of India in the bilateral andmultilateral relations of SAARC May 1999. Terror activity derail peace process members. Decisions are taken on the basis of between India and Pakistan as is the case of unanimity. Bilateral and contentions issues are Parliament attack in December 13, 2001. excluded from the deliberations of SAARC. Mumbai Bomb Blast that saw the cancellation of PROBLEMS OF SAARC: India – Pakistan security level talks in 2006.23 There are many problems in the region, between This misfust was further augmented by the India and Pakistan like Jummu and Kashmir, 26/11 incident in Mumbai. After this attack Terrorism, Drug Trafficking, Wular Barrage, India break up her relation to Pakistan. They Sir Creek Siachin, Baluchistan, Pakistan and met after this attack in Thimpu SAARC summit Afghanistan terrorism, refugees and boundary on April 28, 2010. Many times India – Pakistan disputes. Between India and Bangladesh conflicts effected the process of SAARC. Telepathy, new Moor Island, , Chankma, illegal Afghanistan which was entry into SAARC as a immigration, water sharing and north east member in 2007, faced the problems of Talibani insurgency, Tamil refugees, Kachateevu Island and Pakistani terror attacks. Pakistan wants to and fisherman problem importing on India, Sri make an anti India environment in Lanka relation. Perhaps there is no state in South Afghanistan.The attack on the Indian road Asia which is free from inter state conflicts construction team Nimroz province in 12th April except Maldives but Maldives also faces the 2008 killed two Boarder Rowls Organization challenge of the climate change.14 After the personal an Indian citizen working for Dubai mooted of SAARC, the first problem of Tamils based HEB International logistics was between India and Sri Lanka which was effected Kidnapped in Hirat on 21st April, 2008. Another their relation in 1987, 15 The Tamils problem, eye opener attack on Indian Embassy by suicide impacted on the regional cooperation. The fifth bombers on 7th July 2008 , in which bring Ravi SAARC summit which was held on 1989 in Dutt Mehta and IFS officer V/s Venkateswara Male was postponed and held on November Rao were killed. This was followed by another 1990. 15 India has adapted new policy of non attack on October 8, 2009 India held’s ISI for intervention with active interest in the ethnic planning and the Haqqani network of terrorist conflict of Sri Lanka and focused an economic operating from Pakistan responsible for cooperation. Domestic problems of SAARC carrying out these attacks .26 The big challenge countries some time affected its continuity. In for India is security and safety of its interests 1991 domestic problems in Bhutan effected the and personal in Afghanistan. There are more regional cooperation. The Sixth SAARC summit them 4000 workers, security personnel and which was held in November 1991 not held on about $ 100 million worth of equipment working its time, becausethe King of Bhutan Jigme on different aid and reconstruction project in Singhye Wangchuk stated his inability to attend Afghanistan. South Asian Association for the meeting. The meeting was held on 21st Regional Cooperation (SAARC) constituter one December, 1991 inColombo. Communal and of the most popular regional organizations political tension in India sparked by the accounting for more than 1.5 billion people. destruction in December 1992 of Babri –Masjid The South Asian region with its large population in Ayodhya in the state of Utter Pradesh, and expending economics provides a huge effected regional cooperation. The 7th SAARC market for goods with immense scope for summit which was held in January 13-14, 1993 growth. But the track record of intra-regional not held behalf of this problems and the summit trade with on SAARC Countries has been post pond andagain held on April 10-11 1993 in dismal. We compare the percentage of intra Dhaka.India faced problem with Bangladesh, regional growth between the member states of 4000Km. long Boarder is shared, apart from SAARC it grew from 3.2% 1980 to only 5.5% West Bengal with the sensitive north eastern in 2008. There are two main factors responsible states have the problem of insurgency. India has for kind ring the expansion of intra-regional open border with Nepal and Bhutan and gives trade. One is the lacks of complimentarily and national treatment to each other citizens without presence of competitiveness in the South Asian visas. The open India, Nepal borders are being regional economic status of India viz a viz the used by Pakistan’s ISI, who through Nepal gain smaller South Asian states. The economics of easy access into India and carry out terror the South Asian Countries are basically activities and those detrimental to its security. competitive rather than complementary. India Insurgents from North East India had setup and Bangladesh complete in the world markets

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 for jute goods. India, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka South Asia post history and low level of compete in respect of rice and tea. All countries interaction among regional countries since their compete in respect of manpower experts to West independence. Informal talks among the leaders Asia. The other factor which is responsible for at regularly held SAARC meeting have led to the hindering of expansion of inter regional trade enter elite reconciliation on many sensitive is economic potential and technology of India. issues producing some noteworthy. Results in Its gross domestic product is triple that of the South Asia. rest of the countries of the region taken together. The informal talks between the Indian and The structure of production and technology base Pakistani Prime Ministers at the second SAARC of India covers the entire range of modern summit meeting at Banglore in November 1986, industry. Pakistan and several other neighbors led to the diffusion of bilateral tensions on the are of said that once the trade carriers are issue of India’s military exercise, operation removed, Indian goods will swap the market in Brass- tacks conducted in the Indo-Pakistan the region.These problems of South Asian border. The India, Sri Lank talks at the 1987 Association for Regional Cooperation, effected SAARC Foreign Ministers meeting leading to its development and progress. It is true that their accord on the Tamil problem. For the SAARC has foaled to top its full patentable. suppression of terrorism they make SAARC PROSPECTS OF SAARC: convention on suppression of Terrorism had Before the mooted of any regional organization, been ratified and had come into effect on 22 a member state expects some prospects to their August, 1988.40 An informal meeting and organization. Some prospects were expected by discussion between Prime Ministers of India and SAARC member states. The debate about Pakistan, Narasimha Rao and Nawaz Sharif SAARC future prospects started much before respectively, at Davs (Switzerland), in 1992 the SAARC was formally lanched.32 The heads of Pakistani Government took action to prevent the seven states decided to promote mutual move of Jammu & Kashmir Liberation Front cooperation in the fields of Agriculture, health (JKLF) to cross the ceasefire line in Kashmir and population control, meteorology, postal later that year. The Davos meeting was possible services, rural development, science and because of an earlier informal agreement technology, sports, art and culture, tele- between the two leaders at the Sixth SAARC communications and transport 33. They decide Summit at Colambo in December, 1991. Given to prevention of drug trafficking in the region this utility, SAARC on many occasions had and promote child health and provision of safe displayed its expending role. One of the very drinking wate. They agree to adopt a convention important achievement of SAARC, was on suppression of terrorism in the Kathmandu manifested when t he Agreement on SAARC Summit.35 They regards some economic Preferential Trading Arrangement (SAPTA) was prospects like, establishment of a common signed in 1993 in Dhaka. Unfortunately the market, SAARC Real Pass on liner of on Euro SAPTA experiment offered a limited scope for Rail Pass, free employment in the trade liberalization and admittedly, was not an nongovernmental sector, SAARC control Bank effective building-block to integrating trade for controlling an currency.36 They want to among the member countries. Subsequently the establish a region wide trade facilitation region South Asian Free Trade Agreement (SAFTA) that allows factor and more cost effective was signed in 2004 and came into operation on follow of goods services and capital by them to Ist January, 2006, as effort to sustain the accelerate the trade Liberalization program. momentum of improvised regional trade. Member states have made a programme like a Moreover, signing of the Social Charter and flow of information, free and un restricted Additional Protocol on Terrorism in the 12th travel within the region for all people of SAARC Summit meeting of 2004, held in SAARC. This could be achieved in two stages Islamabad testified to significant achievements firstly as an experimented step the system could of SAARC The issues embraced in the Social be applicable to journalists academicians , Charter include poverty alleviation, population artists, students and other intellectuals, after that stabilization, empowerment of women, for the people of SAARC. They want to make a promoting of health, youth mobilization, human SAARC Ecology Commission for full resource developments nutrition and protection cooperation on ecology. SAARC permits for of children. Afghanistan joined the regional Road Transport, SAARC Neuritis and Drug organization as its 8th member in Dhaka in 2005 Control Commission. South Asian University, and China got status of observer state in SAARC Power and Energy Commission and a SAARC. The most important achievement of SAARC Food and Seed Bank Will the SAARC in 6th Summit, which was held in SAARC leaders have the necessary wisdom and Thimpu (Bhutan) on 28 April, 2010, is the political courage to achieve the above? Will they operationalization of the South Asian University at least dues to dream of it? in New Delhi, which will be open in August, In its twenty six years of history, SAARCs 2014. They agreed on root out terrorism at any performance has been mixed and its political cost and emphasized thelinkages between leaders have met regularly and banked of terrorism, illegal drug and human trafficking and informal discussions to address their mutual firearms etc. In the 17th SAARC Summit, problems. This is no mean achievements, given which was held in Addu (Maldives) on 10-11

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

November, 2011 adopted four agreement, mainly to interstate conflicts between the SAARC agreement on implementation of member countries. Regional Standards and Repid Respus of the CONCLUSION: respective member and SAARC Seed Bank SAARC gets some important achievements in agreement.These are the achievements of the environment of inter- states problems, but it SAARC in the environment of regional is true that SAARC has failed to make its full problems and entrust of the members on each potential efforts, just as every organization needs other. There are many problems in South Asian a gestation period to grow and evolve . The nations before the of SAARC. Including some need to be applied to the growth and boundary disputes between India, Pakistan, evolution of SAARC and not dismiss it as a Bangladesh, Bhutan and Nepal, Hindu problem failure. Thirty years along period in the life of an in Pakistan, Kashmir issue between India and individual, but not in the life of an organization. Pakistan, terrorism, trafficking of drugs and In the modern democratic era, SAARC has arms into region. After the mooted of SAARC completed its 30 years. SAARC developed its Tamil problem between India and Sri Lanka, self an integrated confederation to achieve its domestic problems in Bangladesh and India in value able goals. But the period of SAARC has 1991 and 1992. Many time India – Pakistan been failure with depression. SAARC could not relation make difficulty in the way of SAARC. gain any special achievement with own efforts. The regional cooperation was effected by Even today SAARC is facing the problems of terrorist activities in Kashmir Kargil War in unbelieveness, heterogenetical approaches and May, 1999, Parliament attack in 2001 , Mumbai diverse environment because of prevailing bomb blast in 2006 and terrorist attack in 26/11. terrorism, political instability, military Along with it Telibani attack and Pakistani dictatorship, brutality, violence, economic terrorist activities in Afghanistan in 2008 and backwardness, mutual dishonesty, poverty, Oct. 2009 also hindered the progress of regional illiteracy in the sphere of South Asia. SAARC cooperation. These problems and domestic Countries will have to pave the way of social- tension same time stopped SAARC Summits. economic and cultural cooperation, socio- Therefore SAARC didn’t achieveits prospects economic development and cordial relation with in time of organization and still doing sinking their differences so that SAARC can efforts for prohibition of terrorism, drug, achieve their determinant goals of unbreakable trafficking, SAARC visa scheme, postal service believes, collective sovereignty , socio- and equal currency. SAARC took some economic cultural integration, positive socio- important steps Inter Government Group, political approaches for pragmatic inspiration of SAPTA signed in 1993 which was changed in the betterment of South Asia. SAPTA in 2004. Its aim was liberalization of REFERENCES: trade, social charter protocol on terrorism 1. S., Shakuntala, (May, 2010), “SAARC: A and Afghanistan as a member and china as an study of its Relevence,” Third Concept, observer in 2005 in Dhaka in 2007 and South Vol. 24, No. 279, p.10. Asia University in Delhi opened before 2. Chakraborti, Tridib, (July, 2010), August,2014 was signed in Thimpu in 2010. “Charting Out the SAARC Destiny They agreed for making a SAARC seed Bank in Perambuling its Way Forword,” Wold Addu in November 2011.Since its inception in Focus, Vol. 31, No.7, P-243. 1984 these have also been serious differences 3. Modi, Ranjan, (2004), SAARC : Regional among member countries over the arms and and Global Perspectives, Mangal Deep functioning of SAARC. Such differences have Publication, Jaipur, pp. 11. been pronounced in verbal bickering in several 4. Lal, Jagdish, (Dec, 1993), “Regional SAARC meetings. The social, economic and Cooperation in South Asia: Problems, cultural ties (the espoused ideals of SAARC) are Trends and Prospects,” Third Concept, considered the one and only hope for building Vol. 7, No.82, p. 26. regional cooperation efforts in South Asia in the 5. Kahol, Yudhishtr, (2003), SAARC coming years. Indeed, increasing rationalization Through the New Millennium’ Annual of world trade and the fluidity of the emerging Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,pp. 17. global system has increased trade within each 6. Malik, Hafeez, (1993) , Dilemmar of trade bloc and those countries that do not belong National Security and Cooperation in to any trade block are likely to be the lasers. India and Pakistan, St. Martins Press, New This also provides a strong rationale for York, p.276. sustaining the SAARC vis-à-vis future trade 7. Ibid. prospects of South Asia. The assumption that 8. Anuradha, Muni & Muni, S.D., (1984), peace can be achieved through SAARC without Regional Cooperation in South Asia, addressing the political problems of the region National Publishing House, New Delhi, has neither been able to cultivate peace nor to pp. 29-31. invigorate the SAARC process successfully. 9. SAARC Information Handbook, 1998, Though since its very in co option it has been SAARC Chamber of Commerce & regularly able to held summit meeting yet these Industry, Islamabad, 1998, p. 1. have been interruptions in between owing 10. Syed , M.H., (2003), SAARC Challenges Ahead, Keluso Books, New Delhi, p.11.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

11. Upreti, B.C., (2000), SAARC : Dynamics Among Themselves?”, World Focus, Vol. of Regional Cooperation in South Asia, 33, No. 3, pp. 36-37. Kalinga Publications , New Delhi, p. 147. 29. Singh, Hari Govind, (Dec. 31, 1988), “ 12. Sudhikar, E, (1994) , SAARC : Origin, South Asian Cooperation.” Problems and Growth and Future, Gyan Publishing Prospects,” Mainstream, Vol. 27, No. 14, House, New Delhi, p. 157. p. 13. 13. The Times of India, Delhi, December 8, 30. Das, Debendra Kumar, (1992), SAARC 1985. Regional Cooperation and Development, 14. Mir, Masood Ali, (April, 2012), “Bleeding Deep & Deep Publication, New Delhi, p. South Asia: Need for World Attention,” 147. South Asia Politics, Vol. 10, No. 12, p.20. 31. Gupta, Bhabani Sen, Opcit., p 64. 15. Gupta , Bhabani Sen, (1986), Regional 32. Singh, Hari Govind, Opcit., p. 13. Cooperation and Development in South 33. Kumar, Ranjit, (2005), South Asian Asia, South Asian Publication, New Delhi, Union, Manas Publications, New Delhi, p. 08. pp. 246-247. 16. Upreti, B.C. , Opcit., p.156. 34. Modi, Ranjan, Opcit., p. 66. 17. Chand, Gurnam, (April, 2012), Changing 35. Syed , M.H., Opcit. p. 131. Policy Towards Sri Lanka,” South Asia 36. Sethraj. G., (January, 1991), “SAARC ‘ Politics, Vol. 10, No. 12, p.6. The Reality and Dream, “ Third Concept, 18. Keesing Record of World Events, (Dec., Vol. 4, No. 47, p. 57. 1991), Vol. 37, No. 12, p. 38684. 37. Sharma, Sheel Kant, (July–Sept. 2011), 19. Keesing Recond of World Events, (1993), “South Asian Regionalism: Prospects and Vol. 39, No. 4, p. 39421. Challenges,” Indian Foreign Affairs 20. Murthy, Padmaja, (Nov-Dec., 2007), Journal, Vol. 6, No. 3, p. 310. “India’s Eastern Neighbours: Nepal, 38. Sethraj , G., Opcit., p. 57. Bhutan, Bangladesh: The Security and 39. Chakraborti, Tridib, Opcit., p . 244. Stability Challenge”, World Focus, Vol. 7 40. Murthy, Padmaja, (May, 2008), “Tacking No. Annual, p .411. Terrarism in SAARC”, World Focus, Vol. 21. Ibid. 29, No. 5, p. 175. 22. Abhishek, (Nov-Dec., 2007), “India’s 41. Chakraborti , Tridib, (March, 2012) , Policy Towards Pakistan,” World Focus, “SAARC : The Rising Sun in the New Vol. 28, No. Annual, p. 405. Global Order,” World Focus, Vol. 33, No. 23. S. Pattanaik, Smruti, (May, 2008), 3,p. 27. “SAARC and Security issues in South 42. Ibid. Asia,” World Focus, Vol. 29, No. 5, p. 43. Chakraborti, Tridib , (July 2010), Opcit. , 173. p. 245. 24. Jha, Nalinikant & Kumar, Sumit, (May, 44. Chakraborti, Tridib , (May 2008), 2005), “India’s Policy Towards Sauth “SAARC Expands its Wings: Insinuations Asian Neighbours; Constraints and in the New Global order,” World Focus, Prospects”, World Focus, Vol. 32, No.5, Vol. 29, No. 5, p. 203. p. 274. 45. Chakraborti, Tridib, (March, 2012), Opcit, 25. Dutta, Mandira, (Nov.-Dec., 2008), India p. 28. Afghanistan Relation: Opportunities and 46. C. Dash Kishore, (1996), “The Political Challenges,” World Focus Vol. 24, No. Economy of Regional Cooperation in Annual p. 414. South Asia,” Pacific Affairs, Vol. 69, No. 26. Jha, Nalini Kant & Kumar Sumit, Opcit. 2, pp. 186-187. ,p. 275. 47. Shreekantaradhya , B.S., (1993), 27. Thakur, Archna, (May, 2011), “India’s “Globlisation of India Economy: Role in the Afghan Reconstruction,” Third Strategies and Constraints,” Murty, S. Concept, Vol. 25, No. 291, p. 15. (ed), The Chaning Indian Economic 28. Mehta, Neha, (March, 2012), “Hew Can Order, Indus Publications, New Delhi, p. SAARC Countries be Better Partners 151

A BRIEF REVIEW OF THE INDIA- CHINA BORDER DISPUTE

Rakesh Assit. Professor,Govt. College, Jatuali,HailiMandi (HR)

Dushyant

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Assit. Profesor,Dept. of Political Science DronacharyaGovt College, Gurgaon (HR)

ABSTRACT: After cold war, global order has been shifting because Soviet Union and Unipolar political system have collapsed. World order has pro geo-economic rather than geo-political. There are some critical global challenges emerged before international politics and humanity as like economy recession, environmental challenge, danger disease , terrorism, weapon of mass destruction and United nations reform . Chinese economy is the seconds large economy in the world and it has been growing rapidly in contest it have first position. China has played major role in the contest of geo political and it role can be seen in United Nations and other urbanization. China is a neighbor state of India-.China is constantly in the process of decreasing the impact of India in South Asian region by providing economic, nuclear and military assistance to Pakistan and wants to imbalance the power equation in South Asia andChina has been playing role in counter balancing in against India in Indian Ocean region by its policy ‘String of Pearls’. China has been assisting Bangladesh, Myanmar, Sri Lanka, Maldives, Madagascar and all the neighboring countries by every possible means in term of investing heavily in their infrastructure development programs and by technological and financial assistance Keyword – McMohanLine, Ladak, , Origen of Border dispute, major irritants in India-China border issue, political parameters and guiding principles, INTRODUCTION: between the Tibet Kashmir- Punjab border India–China political relations have witnessed junctio and Nepal-Tibet-Uttar Pradesh border major swings since the heyday of close junction. The eastern sector involves a dispute cooperation in early 1950s and the nadir of the over the area between the pre 1914 outer Line 1962 border war. Though both countries profess and McMohon Line.3The border dispute mainly a desire to work closely to resolve related to McMahon Line in North East and disagreements, have rapidly expanding Ladakh in North West. economic relations, and often engage in strategic THE MCMOHON LINE: cooperation in several arenas, their bilateral This is the boundary line between the two relationship is, by most accounts, fragile. Some countries, east of Bhutan. India has always of the factors that contribute to testy India-China treated the McMohon Line as the lawfully political relations are: mutual suspicion of each demarcated border between India and China. other’s intentions, the bitter memories of the But, China condemned it as ‘imperialist line’. 1962 war (especially in India), the presence in The McMohon line was determined in 1914 at a India of Tibetan exiles led by the Dalai Lama, conference of the representatives of British China’s increasing clout in other South Asian India, Tibet and China held at Shimla. The States, Chinese mistrust of warmer Indo- US conference was held to sort out border relations, and so on. However, the key issues differences between Nepal, Bhutan, Sikkim and that prevent the two countries from establishing Tibet. The Secretary of State for India (In British a stable relationship are the border issue and the Cabinet) Arthur Henry McMohon represented issue of China’s close relationship with Pakistan India in the Shimla Conference. An agreement and its implication for India China relations.1 was concluded which divided Tibet into Inner India and china sharing one of the world’s Tibet and Outer Tibet. The boundary between longest and most rugged frontiers, China and Outer Tibet and Indian was demarcated at the India are the only two countries today without a high mountain peaks. The line was drawn on the fully defined frontline. In the longest continuous suggestion of McMahon line. It is in a way border negotiating process between any two natural boundary also as it passes through Tibet nations in Post- World War II history, China has Plateau in the north and Indian hills in the south. held regular rounds of dialogue since 1981 with The map was signed by representatives of India to settle the festering Himalayan frontier British India, Tibet and China. But the Chinese disputes. But, besides that, the two countries Government did not ratify it. Nevertheless, no have not be able to agree on a mutually defined government of China ever disputed this line of control separating them.2The entire India boundary line India always accepted it. China boundary has never been formally LADAKH: delimited by any mutually accepted treaty. There Ladakh is, and has been, a part of the state of has existed a boundary line of actual control Jammu and Kashmir. The State was under between the two countries. It took shape on the British paramount till independence and later bases of the extent of each other’s administrative accepted to India, as on integral part of this jurisdiction over a long course of time. The country. Although Ladakh- China border was entire boundary has been traditionally divided not demarcated by any treaty, yet India and into three sectors the eastern sector, the middle China have accepted the existing boundary for sector and the western sector with all in dispute. centuries. This boundary was always shown by The western sector involves the dispute over the India in its maps. The tourists who came to India Aksai Chin, India claims as part of Ladakh and from time to time also mentioned this border in China claims as part of Xingjian. The middle their writings. It was made clear in a note sent sector involves a dispute over various points by India to China in 1899 that Aksai Chin was a

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 part of Indian Territory. The revenue records to Chinese territory. India rejected this protest by the State Jammu and Kashmir also confirm that saying that, Barahooti was situated with Indian Aksai Chin was always a part of Ladakh region State of Uttar Pradesh and an Indian post had of Jammu and Kashmir.4 been there for a long time. India also mentioned ORIGIN OF THE BORDER DISPUTE: that Tibet based Chinese official had often been After the end of World War-II, important intruding into this Indian Territory.14For some changes took place all over the world and Asia time after the communist revolution, China had could not remain aloof to this. First of all in not raised any boundary question. Therefore, 1947, India got independence from British Raj when India noticed that about 48,000 sq miles of which lasted for more than 200 years.5Its big territory was shown as part of China, it neighbour China was officially proclaimed in protested. The Chinese leadership dismissed the Peking in October 1, 1949. India was among the maps as old KMT (Koumintang) government first countries to have recognized the People’s mistake. Not only in 1954, but even when Chou Republic of China on December 30, 1948.6On visited India in 1956, his attention was drawn to January 1 1950, two days after the recognition of continuation of maps showing parts of Indian China by India, it announced the liberation of Territory as a part of China. He assured Nehru Tibet as on the main task of People’s Liberation that McMahon Line was accepted to him, and army.7 On October 7, 1950, 4000 Chinese that corrections would be made in the maps.But, troops attacked on Eastern Tibet’s provincial India was shocked when Chou En-lai wrote a capital of Chaundo from eight directions. The letter on 23 January 1959, claiming thousands of small Tibetan force was defeated. 8The Chinese square miles of Indian Territory. He argued that aggression came as a rude shock to India. India Sino- Indian boundary had never been formally initially protested against Chinese invasion of delimited and that the so-called McMahon Line Tibet but only mildly.9In 1954 India entered into was a product of British policy of aggression an agreement with China concerning trade and against the Tibet region of China. China inter course between the Tibet region of China considered the McMahon Line as illegal.15As and India.10This agreement was signed on 29th the relations continued to deteriorate Prime April 1954, for a period of eight years. India Minister of India and China met in April 1960, surrendered its extra territorial rights in Tibet but differences not be resolved, nor narrowed and accepted China’s full sovereignty over down. Indian public opinion did not favour Tibet. Thus, it was accepted that Tibet was a continuation of talk, as no fruitful results were region of China. India gave up the right to expected. Pressed by strong public sentiments, station Indian army units in Yatung and Nehru decided to pursue the forward policy Gyangtse, rationalized arrangement for border which meant that India was to exercise its trade and pilgrimage. India also surrendered its effective control up to its border. By the end of control over post and telegraph administration in 1961, about 56 posts were established by Indian Tibet. The five principles of Panchsheel were forces all along the border. This step perhaps also imported in the agreement.11The five provoked China to take military action.16The principles are: Chinese launched a massive attack on October  Mutual respect for each other’s 20, 1962 in North East Frontier Agency (NEFA) territorial integrity and sovereignty. as well as in the Ladakh sector and declared a  Mutual non- aggression unilateral ceasefire with effect from the mid  Mutual non – interference in each night of 20-21 November, 1962.17The 1962 war other’s internal affairs. froze both position on the border and it would  Equality and mutual benefit, and take a hiatus of 15 years for diplomatic relations  Peaceful co-existence.12 to be re-established. Thou (PM of China) was probably aware that RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF DIPLOMATIC Delhi had made the biggest concession to China TIES: in modern Asian history, not only by giving up In 1976 India and China resumed their India’s extra rights in Tibet but more diplomatic interaction, which had been importantly by giving India’s seal of legitimacy interrupted by the 1962 war. In February 1979, on Chinese occupation of Tibet at a time when on India’s initiatives; Foreign Minister, most nations were condemning it. China had AtalBihari Vajpayee visited China. This was the immediately started constructing roads linking first high level bilateral visit since Zhou’s visit China and Tibet.13A road was built by the to India in April 1962.initially planned for Chinese across the Aksai Chin area in 1956-57. October 1978, it was perhaps fortunate that the visit eventually took place in February 1979, The road was meant to open Western Tibet to rd th Chinese immigrants and to divert its trade from after the 3 plenum of the 11 Central its traditional south ward direction into Western Committee of Chinese Communist Party had China and the Soviet Union. Earlier, in July taken epochal decisions on reforms and opening 1954 (soon after the Trade agreement up of China. After a period of fluctuation incorporation Panchsheel was signed), China fortunes, Deng Xiaoping was firmly in had sent a protest note to India alleging that command.18Deng Xiaoping consolidated his Indian troops had illegally occupied Bu –Je position and power within the Communist Party (Barahooti), an area claimed to be within of China and attained the status of paramount leader. An important intervention came from

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Deng Xiaoping in 1980, when he gave an The JWG was set up to resolve the border interview to an Indian Journalist in which he dispute by examining all relevant matters. The outlined what came to be known as the package JWG was entrusted with preservation of peace deal Analysts judged both the interview and its and tranquility on the border. In 1991, Premier timing to be purposeful although the contents Li Peng visited India and signed the Sino – were more or less on the same lines as that Indian joint communiqué on December 16, proposed by Zhou En-lai. In 1960 and 1962, but 1991.23 In the Joint Communiqué, they taking the actually existing situations the starting reaffirmed their independent foreign policy and point of the bilateral discussions. Neither did the five principles of peaceful co- existence. The Deng go into past history or grievances; he two sides appealed for the joint efforts for the dismissed 1962 as a small episode that should establishment of a new international political not have happened. The offer implicit in the and economic order. Indian reiterated its package deal to move out of the past was not positions that Tibet is an autonomous region of accepted by the then Indian Foreign Minister China and it does not allow Tibetan to engage in Narsimha Rao. To use the Chinese phraseology anti-China political activates in India.24 the political leadership was neither ripe nor AGREEMENTS OF 1993 AND 1996: ready. But the return visit by the Chinese After the two summit meetings in 1988 and Foreign Minister Huang Hua in 1981 led to the 1991, India China interactions shifted from the establishment of an annual dialogue at the level border dispute to the identification of a of Vice Ministers.19 Huang Hua’s India trip was mutuality acceptable Line of Actual Control marked by the agreement to open negotiations (LAC) along the India- China border.25 During on the border dispute and the development of the visit of Prime Minister Narshimaha Rao to India –China relations. There followed eight China, the two countries consolidated the results rounds of China India talks as an official channel of Li Pang’s visit to India in 1991, and signed on of the China India dialogue on the border 7th September 1993, an ‘agreement on the dispute.20 Maintenance of Peace and Tranquillity along the THE EIGHT – ROUND BORDER TALKS Line of Actual Control in the India – China IN THE 1980: border areas. By this agreement both the The eight round border talks took place in the countries pledged not to resort to force or threat period from hostility to detente in India- China of force, and, instead, rely on mutual relations. The talks obviously eased the tensions consultation toward an amicable settlement of in their bilateral relations and resulted in the boundary problem. Pending such a agreement on the disagreements. These talks settlement, the two countries agreed to respect relieved both governments of passing too hard the Line of Actual Control (LAC) top caution on matters of substance while procedural each other for a pullback in case of any disagreement seemed to be employed as excuse deviation, and carry joint inspections to resolve for no – progress. This suggests that neither divergences in perceptions about the LAC government found it urgent to resolve the border alignment, wherever necessary. In order to dispute in the 1980s. Both sides hoped to reduce preserve equal and mutual security as also tensions and stabilize and improve bilateral friendly relation, the two sides decided to engage relations, but they realized it premature to in consultations for a reduction of military proceed to resolve their border disputes.21 development along the Line of Actual Control INDIAN SUMMITS SINO: (LAC) to a mutually acceptable minimum level. After exchange of talks (December 1988) at both The 1993 agreement stipulated, furthermore the the official and non- official levels, summit was reliance on consultation to identify Confidence held at Beijing in December 1988. At this path Building Measures (CBM’s).The agreement breaking Summit the Chinese leader Deng required the two side to confine military Xiaoping and the Indian Prime Minister Rajiv exercises to mutually selected zones. The Gandhi met and held talks.According to the joint agreement ordained consultations by border communiqué issued on 23rd December, 1988 the security personnel to sort out various problems, following decisions were taken: as also consultations for verification/ supervision  By forgetting the last rounds to talks the of troops reduction at the border t agreed level, two sides will try to find out such and for endowing the Joint Working Groups solutions of the boundary dispute as with diplomatic/ military experts in order to would be acceptable to both of them. enhance the capability of JWG with regard to  On the basis of 1954 Panchshell implementation of the Agreement. The Principles both of them will behave like Agreement took care to sustain mutual good neighbours and maintain friendly confidence by ensuring that, while referring to relations. LAC, it did not prejudice the substantive  About the boundary dispute, arising out contention of the two countries on the boundary of Sino-Indian war of 1962, a joint issue.26Under this auspicious circumstance, one working group (JWG) will be formed. more step towards additional CBM’s could be This decision was a revolutionary step taken in 1996, when President Jiang Zemin from the point of bilateral relations.22 visited India. The two countries signed an ‘Agreement on Confidence Building Measures in Military Field along the Line of Actual

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Control in India-China border areas. This milestone in bilateral relations. An important Agreement recalling the Five Principles of outcome of the visit was signing of the Peaceful Co-existence, enjoined that no country ‘Agreement of the Political Parameters and would use its military strength against the other, Guiding Principles for the settlement on India- the border defense forces of either country China boundary question. 31The Chinese would not launch an attack or any military Premier clarified that China regarded Sikkim as operation threatening peace, tranquillity, and an inalienable part of India and that Sikkim was stability along the border. This agreement dealt no longer as an issue in India – China relations. elaborately with ceilings on armed forces and Premier Jiabao also handed over to Prime armaments to be deployed in agreed Minister Man Mohan Singh the revised Chinese geographical zones with due regarded for the Map showing of India.32this was a land mark principles of equal and mutual security, as also agreement that substantially bridged and so far such matters as terrain, road accommodated the positions of both sides. communication, and time required to induct or According to Article III of the guiding deduct soldiers/ armament, etc.The 1996 principles, both states agreed to mutually Agreement wisely stipulated an exchange of acceptable adjustment to their respective maps, so that divergence on intersections of positions on the boundary issue, so as to arrive at LAC alignment could be clarified and eventual a package settlement to the boundary question. agreement on this alignment could be The boundary settlement must be final, covering achieved.27 all sectors of India China boundary. Article –IV 2003 JOINT DECLARATION 2003: notes that the two sides will due consideration to Declaration on Principles for relations and each other’s strategic and reasonable interests. comprehensive: cooperation between the And importantly, from Indian perspective, Republic of India and the peoples or Republic of Article-VII reads, in reaching a boundary China.Prime Minister AtualBihari Vajpayee’s settlement the sides shall safeguard due interests visit to Beijing resulted in an important Joint of their settlement the sides shall safeguard due declaration, which was signed by Indian Prime interests of their settled populations in border Minster and Chinese Premier Wen Jiabao on areas.33There is sufficient scope and more in the 23rd June 2003. In the declaration India and Guidelines, to impart maximum flexibility in the China acknowledged their mutual desire for negotiations that will follow and there are more good neighbourly relations and their broad than adequate safeguard to ensure that peace and common interests.28 India also reiterated tranquility will maintained in the border areas China’s sovereignty over Tibet, a reassurance pending the final settlement.34The visit by that China values since the original 1954 President Hu Jintao to India from 20-23 Agreement only had a validity of 8 years (lapsed November 2006 was the highlight of the ‘India in June 1962). India received a de facto China friendship- year’ activities in 2006. acceptance of Sikkim as an integral part of During the discussion, Prime Minister Dr. Man India.29This step was taken at Prime Minister’s Mohan Singh and President Hu Jintao initiative. The national Security Advisor, Mr. exchanged views on the boundary question and Brajesh Mishra, was appointed as Prime agreed that an early settlement would serve as Minister’s special representatives. China the basic interest of both countries. They asked appointed their senior most Vice Foreign the special representative on the boundary minister Dai Bingguo as his counterpat. Mr. Dai question to intensify their efforts arriving was earlier minister in charge of International towards a mutually agreed framework for the Liaison department of the Communist Party of settlement of the boundary questions.35The China and was then a member of the Central special representatives of India and China on the Committee of the party.The work of the two boundary issue met for the tenth round in New special representatives was to be in addition to Delhi and Connor from 20-22 April 2007 and for the ongoing implementation of the 1993 and the eleventh round in Beijing from 24-26 1996 agreement between India and China on the November 2007. During these talks the two process of clarification of the Line of Actual representative continued their discussion on a Control and on the continued maintenance of framework for the boundary settlement on the peace and tranquility in the border areas. Two basis of the agreement of political parameters rounds of coordinal construction and cooperative and guiding principles of April 2005.36The discussion between the special representatives 14thround of the special two representative’s took place on 23-24 October 2003 and 12-13 talks was held in Beijing, China from 29- 30 January 2004.30 November 2010. The special representatives POLITICAL PARAMETERS AND continued the boundary question. The leadership GUIDING PRINCIPLES: of the two countries on various occasions The year 2005 marked the 55th anniversary of expressed satisfaction at the progress that being the establishment of the diplomatic relations made by the special representatives towards a between India and China. During the year high fair reasonable and mutually acceptable solution. level political exchanges coupled with expansion Both sides have declared that an early settlement of functional cooperation enhanced the bilateral of the boundary question will advance the basic relationship. The visit of Chinese Premier Wen interests of the two countries and shall, Jiabao to India on 9-12 April 2005 signified a therefore, be pursued as a strategic objective.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Meanwhile, peace in border areas was also deep dissatisfaction when Prime Minister maintained in accordance with the relevant Manmohan Singh visited Arunachal Pradesh as agreements signed in 1993, 1996 and 2005, part of an election campaign for the state thereby creating an enable environment for assembly elections. 45However, by insisting on making progress of discussions on the boundary these claims, China is making a settlement of the settlement.37 territorial issue virtually impossible and MAJOR IRRITANTS IN INDIA-CHINA seriously misperceiving public opinion trends in BORDER ISSUE: India.46 Thirdly, India and China conducted a The boundary dispute between India and China number of talks 3 during 1960; 8 during 1981- stands exactly where it did when it first emerged 1987; 15joint working group meetings in 1988- half a century ago.38In making an assessment of 2005 and 14 special representative meeting till or prognosis on the core aspects of the border, October 2010.Although the meetings have made we can identify the three major problem areas. many positive achievements, it is still far away Firstly, the main barrier still comes from the from reading a fair, just, and reasonable Indian side, Indian has a multi-party political agreement.47 system and its society is extremely complicated. Conclusion Various Indian political parties have different The 21st century is Asian century and India – understanding on the India China border issue, China has become the two largest developing and therefore, it is hard for them to reach an countries of the world. However, it was just two agreement on the issue.39Secondly, the most decades ago, when the two countries re- important Sino-Indian border dispute is Chinese established their diplomatic ties in 1980s. Which claim over 90,000 square km of Indian Territory were broken due to the 1962 India China war. including Arunachal Pradesh.41 Since the end of Since then, the two nations have committed Cold War China has adopted a two track themselves that the bilateral problems like approach towards India. On the one hand, border issue would never become the restrain seeking to promote trade and open up the Indian factor in their mutual ties. Consequently, many market China, insisted on high- level political important agreements and Memorandum of dialogue, confidence building measures, and Understanding on trade, border issue, science military –to – military contacts; on the other, it and technology have been signed during the has pursued persistently its expansive territorial bilateral visits. agenda. Insisting on concessions, China engages In India China political relations, border issue itself in endless rounds of discussions, with little and the issue of China Pak relations and its movement forward, on the approach toward the implications for India China relations are territorial question. The Chinese maps show comparatively more important to examine. On Arunachal as part of the Tibet Autonomous border issue, both countries have conducting a Region (TAR) and call it southern Tibet.42The number of talks 8 during 1981-87; 15 Joint Chinese claim is not new and was first aired in working Group meeting during till Jan 2012. 1959 though both Zhou En-lai and later Deng The creation of the “working Mechanism on Xiaoping said that they would be willing to Consultation and Coordination on India-China recognize current realities. The claim was border affairs”, in the 15th meeting of the special officially revived in 1985 in a modified form. representative of India and China in January But during the 1990’s it was kept out of public 2012, seems a good step to taken to resolve this posturing as the two sides tried to build a stable issue. This adds to the exiting plethora of relationship and reach a territorial compromise. framework, mechanism and documents. While In 2006, on the eve of Chinese president Hu on the one hand the agreement indicates Jintao’s arrival (for a state visit) the Chinese resolving the boundary question at an early date, ambassador in New Delhi claimed that the Article- V mentions that proposed working whole Arunachal Pradesh is Chinese mechanism will not discuss the resolution of Territory.44In may 2007, China denied visa to boundary question or affect the special Ganesh Koyu, an Indian Administrative Service representative mechanism. (IAS) Officer from Arunachal Pradesh, who was The proposed mechanism indicates the spirit of to be part of a 107 IAS officer study visit to the agreements September 1993, November Beijing and Shanghai. China pointed out that 1996 and April 2005 and the protocol between Koyu is a Chinese citizen since he belongs to the two sides, which are always debatable and Arunachal Pradesh and hence could visit China lack clarity in public acceptance. Also, none of without a visa. This was a deliberate act of the agreements or protocols has been successful provocation and assertion by Chinese officials at in pursuing the boundary negotiation to an upper that time. In June 2009, China again tried to level. block India’s request for US$2.9 billion loan But these protocols have elaborated the fact that from the Asian Development Bank (ADB) as the nothing can be do without cooperation at this request included US$60 million for flood issue and this would be required political will on management, water supply, and sanitation both sides to bring both for claims (Aksai Chin project in Arunachal Pradesh. This was the first for India, Arunachal Pradesh for China) and time that China sought to broadcast its claim on conflicting LACs (Line of Actual Control) Arunachal Pradesh in multilateral forum. claims into one single process of negotiations Subsequently, in October 2009, China expressed rather than the sequential approach of

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 unilaterally establishing LACs and then 18. Singh, ZorawarDaulet, “After the bargaining. Hiatus: India- China border REFERENCE: Diplomacy since the 1970s”, China 1. Anand, Dibesh, “Revisiting the Report, vol. 47, no. 2. May 2011, p. China-India border Dispute: An 83. Introduction”, China Report, vol. 47, 19. Acharya, Alka, “China and India: no.2, May 2011, pp. 65-66. Politics of Incremental Engagement”, 2. Singh, Sudhirkumar, “Sino Indian HarAnand publication, New Delhi, Relations: Challenges and 20058, pp. 38-39. Opportunities for 21st Century, 20. Dhanapala, Jayantha, “China and the Pentagon publication, New Delhi, third world India”, New Delhi, Vikas 2011, p, 370. publication house Pvt. Ltd. 2005.p 3. Xuecheng, Liu, “Look beyond the 40. Sino Indian border Dispute”, China 21. Ibid. p. 153. Report, vol, no, 2, May 2011. 22. Kabiraj, Shanta, “National interests 4. Tripathi, A.K, “Foreign Policy – in Indian Foreign Policy”, Current, Theory and practice”,Murarilal Agra, 2007,pp. 208-209. publication, New Delhi, 2008, pp. 23. Ray, Jayantakumar, “India’s Foreign 88-89. Relations 1947-2007, Routledge 5. Pokharna, Bhawna, “The Tibet factor publication, New Delhi, 2011,p. 309. and India – China Relations”, The 24. Dixit, J.N, “Indian Foreign policy Indian Journal of political Science, and its Neighbours”, New Delhi, vol. LXX, no. 2, April- June, 2009, p. Gyan publications house, 2001. P.63. 615. 25. Ibid. p.155. 6. Guruswamy, Mohan, Daulet Singh. 26. Dubey, Muchkund, “India’s foreign Zorawar“India China Relations: The policy – Coping with the hanging Border Issue and Beyond” world”, Pearson publication, New publication Viva Books Pvt. Ltd, Delhi, Radiant publishers, 1998, pp. New Delhi, 2009.p88 187-196. 7. Maxwell, Neville, “Sino- Indian 27. Ibid. p.312. border dispute reconsidered”, in 28. Rasgotra, Maharajakrishna, “The economic and political weekly, April New Asian Power Dynamics”, Sage 10, 1999. publication, New Delhi, 2007, p. 185. 8. Sharma, Surya. P, “Sino- Indian 29. Ibid. p. 256. border dispute: An Indian 30. Shukla, Subash, “Foreign Policy of perspective”, The American journal India”,Anamika publication, New of International law, vol. 59. No 1, Delhi, 2007, p. 273. January, 1965. Pp.16-18. 31. Annual Report – Ministry of External 9. Gupta, Ranjeet, “Tibet: the sad saga Affaris- 2005 – 06, of Indian Cravan Diplomacy”, Agni mea.gov.in/mystart. Journal, vol. XI, no. II, p.12. PhP?id=500411908. 10. Bjapai, Kanti and Amitabh Mattoo, 32. Chandra, Vishal, “India’s “The Peacock and the Dragon”,New Neighborhood the armies of South Delhi, HarAnand publication, 2001. Asia” New Delhi, Pentagon Press, 11. Khanna, V.N. “Foreign Policy of 2013. India- Forth Revised and Enlarged 33. Venktshamy, Krisnappa, George edition”, vikas publication, New Princy, “Grand Strategy for India Delhi, 2001, p.115. 2020 and Beyond” New Delhi, 12. C. Sinha, Nirmal, “The China India Pentagon Press, 2012.p45. border”, The China Quarterly,vol 21, 34. Nayak, Nihar, “Cooperative Security January- March 1965, p 80. Framework for South Asia” New 13. Bhattachary, Abanti, “China’s Delhi, Pentagon Press, 2013.p.69. Foreign Policy Challenges and 35. Annual Report- Ministry of External evolving Strategy”, Strategy Affairs- 2006- 2007. Analysis, vol. 30, no.1, Jan- March, Mea.gov.in/mystart. PhP?id= 2006, p .70. 500412689. 14. Bijian, Zheng, “China’s ‘Peaceful 36. Annual Report- Ministry of External Rise’ to Great power status”, foreign Affairs- 2007-2008, Affairs, vol. 84, no. 5, September/ mea.gov.in/mystart.phP?=50041390 October, 2005, pp-18-20. 2. 15. Rumel, Dahiya& K. Behuria, Ashok, 37. Annual Report-Ministry of External “India’s Neighbourhood Challenges Affairs- 2010-11, in the Next two Decades”, Pentagon mea.gov.in/mystart.PhP?id=5004173 press, New Delhi, 2012, p 45. 72. 16. Ibid. p.91. 38. Maxwell, Neville, “Why the Sino- 17. Ibid. p.92. Indian border dispute is still

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

unresolved after 50 year: A Quarterly, vol. 34, no. 2, spring recapitulation”, China Report, vol. 2011, p. 131. 47, no. 2, May 2011, pp. 71-82. 44. Aggarwal, Anand, “Indian China 39. Acharya, Alka, “The Sino Indian border dispute”, 27 February 2012, border”, World focus, vol. 24, no. 7, asyes.in/index.PhP/essay/354 India – July 2003, p. 10. China order dispute? Showall= & 40. Wu Yongnian, “China-India should start= 1. strengthen mutual trust”, Jiefeng 45. Goswami, Namrata, “China Daily, February 14, 2012- English Aggressive Territorial Claims on People daily.com India’s Arunachal Pradesh: A CN/90780/7729124.html. Response to Changing Power 41. Biju, M.R. “New Horizons of Indian Dynamics in Asia”, Strategic foreign policy”, Author press, Delhi, Analysis, vol. 35, no. 5, September 2007, p. 134. 2011, p. 781- 82. 42. Data, Sujit, “Revisiting China’s 46. Dutta, n. 42, p. 549. Territorial Claim’s on Arunachal 47. Kondapalli, Srikanth, “Multilateral Pradesh”, Strategic Analysis, vol. 32, Accord bilateral discord: India – no. 4, July 2008, pp. 549-50. China relations in 2009-10”, World 43. Dutta, Sujit, “Managing and Focus, vol. XXXI, no. 9, September Engaging Rising China: India’s 2010, p. 369. Involving Posture”, The Washington

IMPACT OF URBANISATION ON ENVIRONMENT- A STUDY OF DHARAMSHALA CITY (HIMACHAL PRADESH)

Yug Raj Singh Assistant Professor in Geography Department of Education Government College of Teacher Education Dharamshala District Kangra Himachal Pradesh [email protected]

ABSTRACT:

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

The preindustrial phase is characterized by a system of food economies with inter regional trade and commerce. In this phase the primary sector is the most important, construction and artisan work represent secondary activities and there is no marked division of labor. The industrial phase is marked by the Industrial Revolution which took place in the western European counties. The Industrial Revolution created centripetal development generated by the industries leading to marked territorial division of lobour which in turn involved the push-pull socil economic factors finally resulting in huge migration of rural population to urban settlements. During this phase, the share of primary sector grew smaller as compared to the secondary sector. The final stage called the post industrial phase started with the decolonization period. In this present phase the characteristics of urbanization are not just determined by industrial factors but rather by various regional, social, economic and political factors. This phase also know as the ‘metropolitan phase’ need not have an industrial base and the urban centers no longer concentrate over the congested space around the core. Urban population starts spreading out; as a result sprawls of urban agglomerations emerge and develop around the old urban centres. Generally the city limits expand and economic activities develop in these urban sprawls. URBANIZATION:  Natural growth of population in urban Urbanization is one of the essential feature of areas and the resulting expansion of any modern society. The process of urbanization urban areas brings in many structural and procedural  Migration of people form rural areas to changes in any community and society. The cities in search of better living or urban settlements are characterized by size, employment due to changed social or density and heterogeneity, which in combination economic conditions in the villages provide the basis for a complex division of  Due to increase in population, the rural labour and fundamental changes in the nature of areas get classified as urban town and social relationships. The processes and the administrative body is raised to the relationships in urbanization are both the cause position of Municipality from the and consequences of urban way of life. ‘Panchayat’. This increase in the status Generally, urbanization may be accompanied by and population enables a simple village an increase in goods and services, greater to become a developed village first and employment, higher literacy rates, improved then a semi town and finally a full health and greater contribution to economic fledged town. Later on it becomes a city growth. Urbanization is the process whereby with corporation status Besides these land and inhabitants become urban. Urbanization factors urbanization may take place due means that an increasing proportion of the to other causes like wars, famines, human society becomes townsfolk and as this floods and massive insurgency due to happens towns grow in population, spread in political reasons and refuge problems. area and make an ever increasing impact upon According to Sahai (1980), the three the countryside both on its appearance and upon main factors which affect the growth of the life of its inhabitants. More and more of the urban population in a given decade are: land becomes townscape and people come to Natural increase in population of urban area Net live in an environment that is both physically migration into urban areas and Re-classification and socially urban. (Smailes 1975) balance which takes into account the village G. Hurd et. al. (1973) have suggested that which graduate as towns. Out of the above historically the process of urbanization had three mentioned factors responsible for urbanization, major stages. The first is identified as extending migration from the rural to the urban areas is the from the time when people first began to live in most important. As people move to the cities th town up until the 18 – Century. During this from the rural areas, they take up the lifestyle stage few urban areas had more than 100,000 and work prevailing in those urban areas. The people. The second stage is the rapid growth in rural urban migration is by for the major the sixe and number of cities contingent upon component of urbanization and is the chief the process of INDUSTRIALIZATION. Tables mechanism by which all of the world’s great drawn up by the United Nations Statistical urbanization trends have been accomplished. ( Office show the between 73% and 85% of the Bogue and Zacharia 1962) populations in the industrial countries of the In fact a discussion of urbanization almost west live in cities. The third stage is everywhere in the world is fundamentally a metropolitanization which involves the discussion of net rural to urban migration centralization of people and wealth and of stimulation effects of various demographic society’s political, economic and cultural economic, social and ecological forces which are institutions (see P. Hall, The World Cities, at work. 1977). Other writers would refer to a fourth URBANIZATION AND ENVIRONMENT: stage of deurbanization via the growth of The unprecedented growth of population suburbs, migration to rural areas, alternative coupled with technological innovations and communities and planned ‘new towns’. economic growth, naturally leads to increased  The process of urbanization takes place urbanization. Cities have become the focus of by the principle following factors: trade, commerce and industry giving greater opportunity to the people to make a living.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Today almost one half of the world’s population environment is very complex in urban lives in cities. Cities today play a significant role centres. (Detwayler 1971) in development. They continue to attract  In an urban environment 3 self evident migrants form rural areas because they enable interaction are apprarent.: (1) Urban people to advance socially and economically. areas manipulate their environment (2) Cities offer significant economies of scale in the Physical environment may in turn affect provision of jobs, housing and services and are the form and functions in growth of the important centres of productivity and social centre (3) There is a continuous development. feedback in the city between man, However, the stress of the rapid population culture and physical environment. growth is often overwhelming. The long list of  The above discussion make it clear that afflictions includes environmental deterioration urbanization leads to the disturbance of which further has several other repercussions. the ecological balance and that cities are The first adverse impact of urbanization is the the loci of environmental degradation disruption of the ecological balance. The but unfortunately urbanization and its demand for space, energy, etc leads to associated implications come in a single deforestation and conversion of prime package ad one has to take the bad with agricultural land to urban uses. Rapid urban the good. growth leads to excessive exploitation of the  Deterioration of environmental quality resource base. The surrounding regions get has become one of the major crisis in the affected due to growing demands for energy, world. Cities all over the world face the food and materials. Another important effect of challenges of accommodating the need urbanization is the problem of environmental and by product of dense population pollution. As a city grows in size the metabolic which are manifested in the form of activities also increase resulting in higher environmental hazards. Specifically generation of metabolic byproducts like growing cities of less developed industrial waste water, noise and polluted air. countries typically experience the  In an urban settlement the ecological double environmental health jeopardy of balance rarely exists and this traditional risks from infectious diseases unfortunate situation is due to over and the physical and chemical hazards interference and exploitation of the that accompany poorly regulated biotic and abiotic environments by man. industrialization, substandard housing,  When we think environment the things traffic hazards and social violence. that instantly come to our mind are air,  In India the physical environment of the land, water, wildlife, etc. These only cities is degrading day by day. Pollution constitute the physical attributes of the of air, water, land and noise, over- environment. But the environment is not exploitation of resources, slums, complete unless it also includes equally poverty, illegal construction ,congestion important social and human parameters, etc. ae the main features of urban viz. human welfare, social justice, safely environment. and security, health, education, culture,  Urban environment of India is job opportunities, peace and above all a threatened today with appalling clean environment. Everything which problems of disorder, water, air and surrounds us may collectively be termed ground pollution, noise, health hazards as the environment. (Asthana 2001) and stagnation. If urban growth  Environment is traditionally defined as continues at the present pace, then the that category of forces and influences urban environment will get more acting upon an organism and in relation degraded with more congestion, more to which the organism is capable of traffic fumes, more waste materials and reacting and in return influencing. more pollutants. Environment is an inseparable whole  Among the various environmental and is constituted by interaction system problems the problem of pollution is of physical biological and cultural most widespread. Pollution is the elements. undesirable change in the physical  Environment is the aggregate or sum chemical or biological characteristics of total of external conditions that air, water, or land that are harmful to influence the life of an individual or humans and other life forms and living population specifically the life of a man. conditions. Since urbanization is one of the main  those activities conscious or factors responsible for the deterioration unconscious of man and his domestic of environment, towns and cities are the animals and the result thereof, which centres of environmental problems like detract in any way directly or indirectly air, water, soil and noise pollution, the in the ling or short term, form enjoyment relationship between man and of his environment and his ability to

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

derive full benefit there from. (Dixon withdrawals of wastes, agricultural run- 1972) offs, improper agricultural practices,  Pollution is now one of the most religious and social practices and pervasive problems of our society. domestic sewage. Heavy discharge of pollutants in air, soil  Water gets polluted when its physical or and water is rapidly contaminating the chemical characteristics are changed quality of the environment and is Pollution of surface and ground water making it less suitable for the healthier can harm living organisms or make survival of human beings vegetation and water unfit for drinking or other uses. all other organisms. (Bedi 1995) Consuming polluted water causes  By far air pollution is the most obvious diseases like cholera, diarrhea, hepatitis kind of environmental damage; and typhoid whereas leprosy, scabies vehicular emission is the most important and conductivities are some of the factor responsible for air pollution diseases associated with scarcity of followed by other factors like industrial water. All these could be attributed to growth, domestic pollution, etc. In small the rapidly increasing population and cities private transport is the major cause lack of resources. Inadequate access to of air pollution. safe drinking water and sanitation  Air pollution is growing more and more facilities leads to higher infant mortality acute which make life or the dwellers in and intestinal diseases. the large cities substandard. Increasing  In addition to the population of air and incidence of respiratory diseases such as water the quality of land too gets asthma and bronchitis is recorded in degraded in the urban areas. The cities like Delhi and Ahmedabad. degradation of land due to its misuse Industrial emission and growing number and various human activities is termed of auto vehicles like scooters, rikshaws, as land pollution. Haphazard disposal of cars and heavy vehicles account for air urban and industrial waste, exploitation pollution which has crossed the level of of minerals and inadequate and wrong tolerance in India’s major cities. (Sheth agricultural practices are some factors 1997) responsible for land pollution. In the  The high influx of population to urban urban areas there is a greater demand for areas, increase in consumption pattern housing which means more raw increasing traffic and unplanned urban materials are required. This leads to and industrial development has led to quarrying and destruction of the forests. the problem of air pollution in. The The houses have to be supplied with growing Indian cities are affected by water and power, therefore dams are environmental problems not the least of constructed which again is done at the which is deteriorating air quality. Apart cost of forests. Land pollution includes from the concentration of vehicles in visible waste and litter as well as urban area, other reason for increasing pollution of the soil. Soil gets vehicular pollution are the types of contaminated due to the use of chemical engines used, age of vehicles, congested fertilizers and pesticides. traffic, poor road conditions, and  Another kind of nuisance in the cities is outdated automotive technologies and noise. The main reasons behind noise traffic management systems. All these in pollution are poor urban planning. Noise turn lead to an increase in the air pollution however remains confined to pollution levels and have adverse affects the busy areas where there are industrial on the health of people. The substances units, more traffic and more congestion. pollution the air consist of gaseous  Although there is no single universally pollutants and suspended particulate accepted criterion of what constitutes matter such as dust, fumes, mist and noise pollution or excessive noise it is smoke. Some of the most important air unquestioned that excessive noise has pollutants are suspended particulate adverse effects on human health. matter (SPM), nitrogen oxides, carbon (Grewal 1995) mono-oxide, lead, sulphur dioxide, etc.  In the urban setting a common scene is Moreover, the air quality guidelines of waste dumped along the roads. Waste is World Health Organization (WHO) are a general term used for undesired and regularly being exceeded in Indian mega discarded material in a solid form which cities and in some cases to a great includes household waste like paper, extent. packaging, glass bits, food residues,  After air pollution, the pollution of garden waste and also metallic wastes. water is the most obvious kind of Wastes in urban areas arise from environmental damage in India. The residential, commercial, industrial and main causes of water pollution are institutional uses which are often not urbanization, industrialization, handled properly. Residential; wastes

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

are in the form, of garbage which accessible, researchers survey only a includes packages, food wastes, etc. sample. commercial wastes are generated form  In the present study to know the shops, offices, restaurant, warehouses reaction, response and intervention of and hotels. They range from vegetable the people towards environmental wastes in markets to packing material, problems, 520 families wee selected. metal, plastic etc, Institutional wastes These 520 families were selected include those wastes that arise from through systematic sampling method. In hospitals, educational institutions and this sampling method a collection of from other services. Apart from these elements is obtained by drawing every sources, construction debris with heaps nth person from a pre-determined list of of sand, stone, bricks, rubble etc. on persons. In simple language it is the streets and vacant plots are major process of randomly selecting the first sources of nuisance which also cause respondent and then every nth person traffic hindrances, besides presenting an after that. When this method is ugly sight or visual pollution. employed, samples are taken from the  The waste disposal system in towns and sampling frame on the basis of sampling cities is grossly inadequate, as a fraction that is equal to N/n (where N is consequence of which huge dumps of the number of units in target population garbage on the roadsides, is a regular and n is the number of units of the sight in almost all cities. sample).  Improper and inadequate disposal of These families wee selected from 5 sewage is another problem in the urban wards out of total 25 wards. These 5 wards ere areas. In the developing cities many however selected through purposive sampling households do not even have access to method. In this type of sampling the selection of sewer lines. There are makeshift units is deliberate and based on prior judgment. arrangements like septic tanks and The 5 wards were selected from the north, south, conservancy system which leads to dirty east, west, and central region of the study area. and unhealthy living conditions. Even The 5 wards that were selected and the number the sewage that is collected through the of families in each ward are as follows. sewer pipes is not disposed properly and REACTION AND RESPONSES OF THE is dumped into nearby rivers. Absence RESIDENTS TOWARDS URBANIZATION of proper sewerage system in the newly AND ENVIRONMETAL PROBLEMS: developed and developing housing In the present research work an effort has been colonies is one of the major problems of made to know the reaction and responses of the sanitation. It not only leads to residents towards the changing face of the city deterioration of the quality of areas but with respect to the process of urbanization and is also a root cause of numerous its influence on the surrounding environment. infections and parasitic diseases. Man has always been influenced by his  Looking at the prevailing environmental surrounding environment. He is sensitive to the condition of the Indian cities one can various changes that take place around him. easily visualize the urban sanitation Man’s attitude, lifestyle, viewpoint is shaped to conditions. Heaps of garbage and a great extent by the phenomena that occur drainage channels clogged with waste around him. As far as the process of along the road side facilitate the urbanization is concerned it brings about radical proliferation or disease inducing change in the society, the economy, the polity organisms and pose immense health and the environment of a particular place. The hazards. Stray animals like cattle, pigs, process of urbanization manifests itself in the mules and dogs are other sources of form of several changes that ultimately influence unsanitary conditions further the society. Keeping this in mind the samples are aggravating the situation. interviewed in order to know the responses of  Thus it become clear that with the the residents towards the process of urbanization increased process of urbanizations, as and its influence on the surrounding cities continue to grow there emerge a environment of the city. number of problems – those of The tables and the responses the follow give a resources, overpopulation, congestion, representation of the respondents’ viewpoints, squatter, and slums, poverty and his awareness, his attitude and his perceptions eventually of environmental regarding the urbanization and environmental degradation. problems of Dharamshala.  A sample is a small portion of people Table 1: Observations of Respondants taken from a larger population. It is regarding Urban development representative of the population from S.No Nature of Frequenc Percentag which it is drawn. When the population . Responses y e is relatively large and is physically not 1 Congestion and 20 20% Traffic

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Problem due to Popoulation 50 (50%) of the total respondents were aware of Growth. the meaning of environment. They said that 2 Change in 19 19% everything that surrounds us is called Population and environment. This shows that about half of the Infrastructure. sampled population knows the correct meaning 3 Increased 17 17% of environment. 23(23%) respondents said that Infrastructure clean air, water, and land is environment. 17 Problems respondent i.e. 17% said that green cover on 4 Increase in 16 16% earth is environment. The remaining 10(10%) Crime respondents did not know anything about the 5 Depleting 16 16% meaning of environment. This shows that about Greenry and half of the people know the meaning of increasing environment and half do not have much idea Pollution about the correct meaning. 6 Dehumanizatio 12 12% Table 3: Opinion on Effect of Urbanization n of Human on Sorrounding Environment Relations S. Response Frequency Percentage Total 100 100% No. Out of the total 520 respondents, 101(19.42%) 1 Yes 94 94.0% respondents felt that there has been an increase 2 No - 00.00 in population followed by congestion over 3 Don’t 6 6.0% construction and traffic problem. 99(19.04%) Know respondents said that the city has changed in Total 100 100.00 terms of population and infrastructural problems. Out of the total 100 respondents 94 i.e. 94.0% They said that population has grown and the think that the changes taking place in the city problem of basic infrastructure like water, have affected the surrounding environment electricity etc. has increased sharply. whereas 6 (6.0%) respondents do not know 93(17.88%) said that population has grown, whether or not the environment has been social relations have degraded and crime rate has affected by the changes taking place in the city. increased 86(16.54%) out of the total Table 4: Age wise categorization of the respondents said that population growth increase respondents in traffic and pollution and depleting greenery Age Yes(%) No Don’t Total are the major changes that have taken place. Group Know(%) 85(16.35%) respondents said that living standard in of the residents has increased leading to more years opulence and show off and that relations have 20 and 15 (15%) 2(2%) 17 become impersonal. The remaining 56(10.77%) below respondents said that the city is developing at a 21-30 24 (24%) - 1(1%) 25 fast rate. Thus it becomes clear that the major changes 31-40 26(26%) - 2(2%) 28 that have taken place in the city are population 41-50 14(14%) - 2(2%) 16 growth leading to infrastructural problems, 51-60 9 (9%) - - 9 congestion, traffic problem, over construction, Above 5(5%) - - 5 etc 60 Table 2: Respondants’ Perception of Total 93 (93%) - 7(7%) 100 Environment The above table shows that 74(90.24%) S.No. Nature of Frequency Percentage respondents below the age of 20 felt that the Responses changes in the city have affected the 1 Appropriate 50 50% environment of the place and 8(9.76%) awareness of respondents did not know whether the changes the concept of have affected the environment or not. Out of the Environment total 126 respondents between the age group 21- 2 Clear Air, 23 23% 30, 122(96.46%) said yes and only 4(3.18%) Water and respondents didn’t know the answer. In the age Soil as group of 31-40, there were 153 total respondents Environment out of which 143(93.46%) said that the changes 3 Green cover 17 17% in the city have affected the surrounding on Earth as environment and 10(6.54%) said no. in the age Environment group of 41-59 years, 72(90%) people said that 4 Not clear 10 10% the changes have affected the environment and about the only 8(10%) respondent didn’t know the answer. concept of All the 51 respondents belonging to age group Environment 51-60 were affirmative in their response. Total 100 100% Similarly all the 28(100%) respondents falling

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 under the age group of above 60 years also gave Others 24 - 1 25 positive response. (24%) (1%) Table 5:Sex wise distribution of the Total 95 - 5 (%) 100 respondents (95%) Sex Yes (%) No Don’t Total Out of the total respondents engaged in Know agriculture, 6(85.75%) respondents said yes and (%) only 1(14.29%) respondents was not sure. All Male 81(81%) - 2(2%) 83 the 105(100%) respondents belonging to service Female 16(16%) - 1(1%) 17 sector gave affirmative answer. 165(96.49%) out Total 97(97%) - 3(3%) 100 of the total 174 respondents belonging to the Out of the total, 419(96.99%) male respondent category of trade and commerce said yes and said that the changes have affected the remaining 6(3.51%) said don’t know. surrounding environment and 13(3.01%) male 49(83.05%) respondents belonging to transport respondents said don’t know. In the same way and communication category said yes to the 88 female respondents, 71(80.68%) said yes question and 10(16.95%) said don’t know. In the while 17(19.32%) did not know about the category of housewife, 38(88.37%) respondents affected of the affected of the changes on the said yes and 5(11.63%) said don’t know. In the environment. others category 127(94.07%) respondents said Table 6: Education wise distribution of the yes and 8(5.93%) said don’t know. respondents Table 8: Opinion on Pollution due to Urban Educational Yes (%) No Don’t Total Development Qualification (%) Know S. Response Frequency Percentage (%) No. Illiterate 3 (3%) - 2(2%) 5 1 Yes 95 95% Primary 7(7%) - 1(1%) 8 Middle 7(7%) - 0 7 2 No - High School 10(10%) - - 10 3 Don’t 5 5% Intermediate 13(13%) - - 13 Know Graduate 32(32%) - - 32 Total 100 100% Post Graduate 18(18%) - - 18 The table reveals that 496(95.38%) respondents felt that the air, water and land have become Others 6(6%) - 1(1%) 7 polluted due to development in the city, but Total 96(96%) - 4 100 24(4.62%) respondents did not know whether (4%) the air, water and land become polluted or not. The table suggests that 22(57.89%) out of the Table 9: Age wise distribution of the total illiterate respondents felt that the changes respondents have affected the environment and only Age Yes (%) No Don’t Total 16(42.11%) said don’t know to the question Group (%) Know stated. Out of the total 42 primary passed (%) respondents, 37(88.09%) answered the question 20 and 15 (15%) - 5(6.10) 82 in affirmation and the remaining 5(11.91%) said below don’t know. 34(94.44%) out of the middle passed respondents gave affirmative answer and 21-30 23 (23%) - 8(6.35) 126 2(5.56%) were not sure whether the changes 31-40 28(28%) - 7(4.58) 153 have affected the surrounding environment or 41-50 15(15%) - 4(5.00) 80 not. All the respondents that have passed high 51-60 10(10%) - - 51 school and intermediate and all those who were Above 5(5%) - - 28 graduates and postgraduates said yes to the 60 above stated question. 26(78.79%) respondents Total 96(96%) - 4(4%) 100 from the others category gave positive response Out of the total respondents belonging to the age and 7(21.21%) did not know the answer. group of 20 years and below, 77(93.90%) felt Table 7: Occupation wise distribution of the that the air, water and land has become polluted respondents whereas only 5(6.10%) belonging to this Occupation Yes No Don’t Total category said don’t know. In the age group of (%) (%) Know 21-30 years 118(93.65%) said that the air, water (%) and land have got polluted and 8(6.35%) said Agriculture 1 - 1 2 don’t know. Similarly in the category of 31-40 (1%) (1%) years. 46(95.42%) said yes and only 7(5.58%) Service 20 - - 20 were not sure whether air, water and land have (20%) got polluted or not. 76(95%) respondents Trade and 32 - 1 33 belonging to the age group 41-50 years said yes Commerce (32%) (1%) and 4(5%) people said don’t know. All the 51 Transport and 10 - 1 11 respondents falling under age group 51-60 years communication (10%) (1%) and the entire 28 respondents in the age group of House wife 8 - 1 9 above 60years gave affirmation to the above (8%) (1%) stated question.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Table 10: Sex wise distribution of the Again there were several responses from each respondents respondents every individual had several reasons Sex Yes (%) No Don’t Total for soil pollution. (%) Know  Use of chemical fertilizers and (%) pesticides. Male 83(83%) - 1(1%) 84  Improper disposal of garbage. Female 14(14%) - 2(2%) 16  Lack of awareness among the people. Total 97(97%) - 3(3%) 100  Excessive use of packaging and plastics. Out of the total male respondents, 423(97.92%) Table 12: Opinion on causes for noise said that air, water and land have become pollution polluted and 9(2.08%) said don’t know. Out of S. No. Response Frequency total 88 female respondents, 73(82.95%) 1 Yes 92 (92%) answered positively and 15(17.05%) 2 No 8 (8%) respondents did not know the answer. Total 100 (100%) Table 11 : Occupation wise distribution of In response to the above stated question, respondents 477(91.73%) respondents said that the noise Occupation Yes (%) N Don’t Tota level in the city has increased. The remaining o Know l 43(8.27%) respondents gave negative response. Agriculture 1(1%) - - 1 Table 13 : Sex wise reaction of the Service 21(21% - - 21 respondents ) Sex Yes (%) No. (%) Total Trade and 34(34% - - 34 Male 81(81%) 2 (2%) 83 Commerce ) Female 12 (12%) 5 (5%) 17 Transport and 11(11% - 1(1% 12 Total 93(93%) 7 (7%) 100 Communicatio ) ) Out of the total male respondents, 420 (97.22%) n felt that noise level has increased and 12(2.78%) Housewife 9(9%) - - 9 answered in negation. In the category of Others 24(24% - 3(3% 27 females. 57 (64.77%) felt that noise levels in the ) ) city have increased but 31(35.23%) respondents Total 96(96% - 4(4% 100 felt otherwise. ) ) Table 14 : Opinion on effect of pollution on All the 7(100.00%) respondents practicing human health agriculture and all the 105(100%) respondents S. No. Response Frequency involved in trade and commerce 170 (99.42%) 1. Yes 93 (93%) felt that air, water and land have become 2. No - polluted and only 1(10.58%) said don’t know. 3. Don’t know 7 (7%) Out of the total respondents involved in transport and communication, 53(89.83%) Total 100 (100%) answered as yes and 6(10.17%) were not sure The table suggest that 486(93.46%) of the total whether air, water and land have become 520 respondents felt that living in polluted polluted or not. In the category of housewife, all environment affects the health of the people and the 43(100.00%) respondents said yes. In other 34(6.54%) said don’t know. category, which consists of 135 respondents, Table 15 : Sex Wise reaction of the 118(87.41%) said yeas and 17(12.59%) said respondents don’t know. Sex Yes(%) No. Don’t Total Opinion on causes for air pollution: know  Vehicular emissions and urban effluents. (%)  Deforestation and felling of trees. Male 81(81%) - 2(2%) 83  Lack of awareness among people Female 12(12%) - 5(5%) 17 towards various environmental issues. Total 93(93%) - 7(7%) 100  Tendency of taking the environment for Out of the total 432 male respondents, 417 granted. (96.53%) said that living in polluted Opinion on causes for water pollution: environment affects the human health and only In response to this question again every 15(3.47%) said don’t know. Among the female individual gave different reasons. respondents, 69(78.41%) said yes where as These are: 19(21.59%) said that they don’t know whether  Discharge of garbage into the canals. living in polluted affects the human health or  Excessive use of chemical fertilizers and not. pesticides. SUGGESTIONS:  Improper method of sewage disposal. For Air Pollution: In response to the above  Presence of crematorium ‘Chitrashila question each individual had more than one Ghat’ near water source. suggestion. The suggestions given by different  Lack of awareness among the people. people are as follows: Opinion on causes for soil pollution:  By planting more and more trees.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

 People should get their vehicles checked  Starting awareness programs in order to regularly. educate the people regarding various  Pollution under control certificate environmental problems. should be made mandatory for all REFERENCES: vehicles. 1. Asthana D.K. and Meera Asthana.  By minimizing the use of generators. (2001). Environment Problems and  By using electricity operated and CNG Solutions. S. Chand and Co. NewDelhi. vehicles. 2. Bedi S. J. (1995). Effect of Artificial  Setting up factories away form the city. Fumigation of Sulphur Dioxide and  Punishing the culprits who do not abide Ammonia on Raphanus sativas, in by the rules. Environmental Pollution and Protection  Spreading awareness among the people (Ed) Garg M.R, V.K. Bansal and about environmental problems. Tiwana. Deep and Deep Publications. For Water Pollution: Again the responses New Delhi. regarding this question were varied. The various 3. Breeze, Gerald. (1969). Urbanization in suggestions given by individuals are: Newly Developing Countries. Yale University Press.  Water canals should be covered so that 4. Detwyler T.(1971). Man’s impact on the they are not used for dumping garbage. Environment. Mc Graw Hill. New York.  Overhead water tanks should be cleaned 5. Dixon D.M.( 1972). Population, regularly. Pollution, Health in Ancient Egypt, in  Sewage should have proper disposal Population and Pollution (Ed) Peter mechanism. R.Cox. et al. Academic Press. London.  Capacity of the filter and processing 6. Grewal, R.S. (1995). Noise Pollution: a plant must be increased. case for Comprehensive Legislation, in  Garbage should not be thrown into Pollution and Protection(Ed)Garg M.R, canals. V.K. Bansal and Tiwana. Deep and  Proper cremation of dead bodies, away Deep Publications. New Delhi (1995) from the water source. 7. Hurd, G.et al. (1973). Human Societies-  There should be a proper drainage an Itroduction to Sociology. London: system. Routledge and Kegan Paul.  People should be made aware above 8. Misra, R.P.(1978). Million Cities of environmental problems. India. Vikas Publishing House. New  Punishing the culprits. Delhi. For Soil Pollution: To this question also there 9. Sheth, Pravin.(1997). Environmental were many suggestions from each individuals. Politics, Ecology and Development. All the different type of suggestions from all the Rawat Publications. New Delhi. individuals is given above. 10. Smailes, A.E.(1975). The Definition and  Using organic fertilizers and manures. Measurement of Urbanization, in Essays  Dumping garbage at proper places. on World Urbanization  Minimizing the use of plastics and 11. (Ed) Jones Ronald. George Philip and polythene bags. Sons Ltd. London.  Minimizing the use of pesticides. 12. Sunder, I and P.K.Muthukumar.  Proper disposal of non bio-degradable Environmental Sociology. Sarup and waste. Sons. New Delhi. 13. Thompson, W.S. (1984). Urbanization, in Encyclopedia of Social Science.

DIGITAL LIBRARIES AND ITS IMPORTANCE IN OPEN AND DISTANCE EDUCATION

Dr. Ram Chander Librarian, Aggarwal College Ballabagarh E-mail:[email protected]

ABSTRACT: Information and communication technology have brought significant changes in all-round development of the society through transmission of information. Information is the fulcrum for power, wealth and is very

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 crucial for economic and social development of the society. In India, a number of digital libraries and automation programmes have been initiated across the country. Most of the digital libraries are initiated and funded by our Government. The Ministry of Communication and Information technology has also established a number of digital libraries in India. This paper has made an attempt on the various facets – different problems, challenges and issues involved in development of digital libraries in India. Keywords:Digital Libraries; Open and Distance Education. INTRODUCTION: National Science Foundation and was launched In the technological era, Digital Library is in 1994. playing vital role by implementing the advanced The concept of digital libraries in India began in technologies to cater the facilities to its the mid 1990s with the spread of information clientele. The impact of the computer, technology, the internet and the support of the communication and Networking and Information Central Government. In 1996, this concept was technologies have completely changed the recognized during the Conference on Digital concept of conventional library. Virtual library, Libraries organized by the Society of Electronic library, Paperless library, and Information Science at Bangalore. Though a few Libraries without wall are the synonymous libraries have made attempts earlier in this terms which represent the Digital Library. direction, the digital library initiative in India is Library collections, which are stored in digital still at budding stage. formats, are called Digital Library. The digital PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH content in file format may be stored locally, and DIGITAL LIBRARIES: accessed globally via networking of the The digitization initiatives in India are computer systems. The term Digital Library was encountered with the problems of lack of first popularized by the NSF/DARPA/NASA technical infrastructure, trained manpower, Digital Libraries Initiative in 1994. Information finances and policy initiatives. Some of the and Communication Technologies (ICTs) have other problems are: brought significant changes in all-round  Lack of clear cut policy at National development of the society through transmission level with main focus on sustainability of information. Application of information  Outdated software, hardware, and technology to Library and Information Science difficulty in upgrading the same. has provided wider opportunities in archiving  Non-availability of cost effective new and accessing knowledge in the digitized form technological advancement. besides conservation and preservation of the  Non-standard technical activities, data traditional knowledge. Digitization of materials description and transmission will provide enhanced access to the electronic characteristics, non-availability of well- information sources and the users can access the trained skilled personnel. digital content irrespective of time and space  Lack of management support and lack of boundaries. proper preservation policy In India, digital library initiatives were  No Intellectual Property Rights policy undertaken initially with a view to preserve the for content development of digital art, culture and heritage of the country. Some information. Finally, the Rigidity in the special libraries are also engaged in digital publishers’ policies and data formats are library initiatives in a limited way. However, the biggest problems associated with initiatives in academic libraries particularly in digital libraries. the Open Distance Education Libraries (ODE) The above factors affect the success of are yet to venture into the digitization. As such, digitization initiatives and the creation of digital this paper proposes to: libraries. These problems have to be addressed  Study the digital library initiatives positively to ensure planned digital resource undertaken so far by the Government and development programmes and digital libraries in other organizations in India. the country. In order to achieve it, the following  Examine the challenges and problems faced factors may be taken into consideration. in the digital library initiatives, and NEED OF DIGITAL LIBRARY:  Propose a digital library initiative for the . To overcome the shrinking space ODE institutions in India. problem DIGITAL LIBRARY INITIATIVES IN . To preserver valuable rare database INDIA: . To preserve the cultural heritage Many large libraries throughout the world . Globally Accessibility started digitizing their materials in early 1990s. . Need not Physical presence In 1992, Cornell University formed the digital . Keep pace with the modern access coalition to explore the use of digital technologies imagery, which is now taken up by the Cornell . To preserve the Nations cultural Institute of digital collection. Launched in 1992, heritage the Yale University Open Book Project has To build up a Digital Library following th th converted its micro filmed volumes of 19 & 20 Hardware and software infrastructure is century books into digital format. The US necessary for any Digital Library. Always Digital Library Initiative is funded by the select/purchase the latest generation

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 models/hardware and consider high capacity . Protect the valuable database from gadgets for the DL. Following hardware and hackers or malicious community software are the minimum requirement to . Protect Database from Virus attack by buildup DL. installing Anti-virus Server configuration:- . Installing firewalls on switch to prevent . Processor : the unauthorized access to server Single/Multiprocessor processing . Install database on multi location to (1.66 MHz speed or above ) prevent database from any natural . HDD : Large capacity of disaster hard disk space (minimum 1 to 2 TB . DL software is having inbuilt security disc space) feature to protect the . RAM :16 GB to 64, GB Database RAM (Min. requirement as per DIGITAL LIBRARY – A PROPOSAL FOR budget) ODE: . RAID 5 : Data mirroring or Distance Educational Learners’ characteristics data imaging to prevent form any loss are different from students in the traditional . UPS : To prevent the data universities. They are generally adults, loss from irrupted power supply employed and have family responsibilities. Their . Upgradeability : Always buy a any motivation levels are generally high and are product which will compatible with willing to take responsibility for their own advanced model education. Mostly they are self-directed and . Power supply : choose redundant study on independent basis. They choose a power supply products in case of variety of ways for learning and take control power failure over their learning. They are mainly constrained Computer configuration:- by the problems of access and retrieval of the . Processor/CPU : 2 to 4 GB RAM, required information from libraries. The 160/250 GB HDD, Core 2 duo problems as described by Angel and Budnick processor, Combo Drive, 17” (1986) and Cooper and others (1998) are: TFT/ LCD  The distance learning institution may Monitor, UPS not offer library services to the learners. . Scanner : Purchase of  Learners have reluctance to travel long High-end resolution scanner of HP distances to use the library (large flat bed )  Lack of information literacy skills. . Digital camera : High-end  Lack of knowledge in using libraries or digital camera of Nikon, Minolta, using electronic information sources. Canon (Max. pixel)  Reluctance to approach the librarian and . Lights : Appropriate library staff members for help in light equipments and stands to mounts retrieving the information. camera Digital library provides an answer to most of the Digital Library Software:- information access problems of the distance . Digital library Software : learners. Today, ODE institutions bring Greenstone, D-Space, E-Prints, education at the doorsteps of the learners Ganesha, Fedora etc through networks. The Internet also plays a vital . Operating System role in acting as a powerful tool to the learners. :Windows or Linux or Sun Operating Digitization of scholarly materials is one of the system many initiatives undertaken by institutions . Optical Character Reorganization : across the globe, which facilitates wide access Ariel, ABBY fine reader, Omni page and availability of such materials. . Image cleaner : The ODE institutions can initiate a consortium To clear the soiled, stained images or that will plan, co-ordinate and implement a object national level digital library for the benefit of Networking/ Internet connectivity:- distance learners. Each individual member . High speed internet connectivity (2 to 8 institution of the association should share its Mbps speed) learning resources. This way, a wide range of . Network setup with manageable D-link collection of learning materials can be switch and Cat 6 Cabling or Wireless developed. This should be made available to the networking learners and accessible through the Intranet and . Data Centre to host a data the Internet. A digital rights management system . Web portal can be interlinked with the digital library to . Skilled manpower/ hardware, software, address the copyrights and other related issues. network expert team or AMC India has 1 Open University at the national level STANDARDS FOR CREATING OF and 13 State Open Universities offering courses DIGITAL LIBRARY:: Dublin core standard only in distance mode. These universities have for creation of DL records libraries to meet the information needs of their Data security/ Disaster recovery of Digital learners. All these universities subscribe to Library

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 several high value journals with substantial Distance Education Council. This agency will duplication. In addition, they publish create necessary infrastructure to network the newsletters, annual reports, thesis, course digitized resources of all the universities and materials, and old question papers etc., which rationalize the access of the high valued are important resources for the learners. electronic journals and other resources. The The duplication of resources can be avoided, if proposed digital network with DEC as the an agency is formed under the headship of agency is presented below Proposed Digital Library Network of DEC

All the open universities should come to an understanding regarding digitization of the material and networking of the resources for implementation Digital libraries of ODE institutions should aim in a phased manner. at providing the following services to the learners:- . Digital / virtual reference service crossed the one billion mark and ODE is playing . Information service through e-mail a very significant role in educating the masses. It . Powerful search tools to retrieve the is expected that the proposed consortium of whole or parts of a digital document, ODE digital libraries would go a long way in etc. making the Indian workforce the best of its kind Expected Benefits from the proposed Digital in the world. Library are: REFERENCES: Apart from providing wider access and free flow 1. Ali, Amjad (2007). Digital Libraries and of information to distance learners and to all Information Networks. – New Delhi: those involved in open distance education, the ESSESS Publications. pp. 170-207. proposed digital library provides several 2. Arms, William Y (2000) Digital advantages. Some of these are – Libraries. – Cambridge: M.A: MIT . Networking and sharing of resources Press. can be done easily; 3. Arms, William Y (2000) Digital . It provides cost effective solutions to Libraries for Distance Education. libraries; 4. Das, Anup Kumar, Sen, B.K. and Dutta, . More information can be provided at the Chaitali (2005). Digitization of press of a button. The user do not have Scholarly Materials in India for Distance to travel long distance and his/her time and Open Learners. and resources will be saved; 5. Available on Farnes, Nick “An . Information can be updated International Digital Library for continuously much more easily; Distance Learning: Research Issues for . Collaboration and exchange of ideas is the UK Open University’s International possible; Centre for Distance Learning (ICDL)” . Improved preservation of resources; 6. Jain, P.K., Jindal, S.C. and Babbar, CONCLUSION Parveen(2006). “Digital Libraries in So far, the Indian digital library initiatives are India : initiatives and problems” In mainly seen as academic and research oriented. International Conference on Digital Though some useful resource material such as Libraries 2006 : information land records, cartography, policy documents, management for global access. – New legal judgments, parliamentary discussions etc., Delhi: TERI. pp. 22-31. are being made available; they are not on large 7. Kalpana Dasgupta (2005) Digitization, scale. Most of these initiatives are done in sustainability and access in the Indian isolation without any coordination with other context. Available on similar institutions. None of the existing digital 8. Ramesha, Karisiddappa, C.R. and library projects meets the specific needs of the Ramesh Babu, B (2008). “Digital ODE users. With the booming of the Indian Library and Digital Library initiatives in economy, and an increasing skilled work force, India” In Libraries in Digital the need for continuing education programmes is Environment: problems and prospects ever increasing. The population of India has edited by Sunil Kumar Satpathy,

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Chandrakant Swain and Bijayalaxmi 10. Sree Kumar, M.G and Sreejaya, P Rautaray – New Delhi: Mahamaya. pp. (2006). “Digital Library Initiatives and 1-27. Issues in India: efforts on scholarly 9. Sacchanand, Chutima (2002) knowledge management” In Digital Information literacy instruction to Libraries in Knowledge Management by distance students in higher education: M.G.Sree Kumar… [et al]. – New librarians’ key role Delhi: ESS ESS Publications. pp. 17- 11. 37

STUDY OF WOMEN IN TAGORE’S FICTION

Reena Kumari Grewal Research Scholar, Singhania University Pacheri Bari, Distt. Jhunjhunu -333515, Rajasthan (India) The chief attraction of Tagore’s novels is the and attraction. He expresses womanhood in disclosure of the hearts of men and women. different phases and stages. His works are the Tagore had an intense insight into women’s generation of his age. None in India championed heart. He displays in many of his novels his the cause of women so powerfully and feelings of the calmness, love and devotion of consistently as Tagore. The tragedy of the girl- the Hindu wife. His characters of pictures of wife, teased by the mother-in-law with the Indian womanhood are appreciable for its truth husband as an unsupportive spectator only has

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 moved the soul of society. Tagore placed before wanted these women to come out from home world the ideal of self shining Indian woman. He and take part in the world affairs. But we should also placed the typical Indian, conventional and keep in mind that Tagore was always this view,” orthodox women, who suffer a lot. domestic work is a necessity for a woman.”4 Tagore’s heroines of early period are confined to Asha the side heroine of the novel Binodini is the Zenana. Even his own family residence in also a conventional woman. This novel has been Calcutta was divided into Mahals according to welcomed unanimously as the first Muslim practice, the inner apartments reserved psychological novel of India. To use the words for ladies being out of bounds for men like the of Krishna Kripalani:“It is the one of Tagore’s Muslim harem. No woman of this period had novel in which the author watched the human college education. Tagore advocated modernism drama with such a gentle and calm irony without but condemned ultra-modernism. His the intrusion of poetic rhapsodies or intellectual conventional girls are expressed as being dissertations.”5 married before reaching their teens. The trails The novel consists of four major characters – and tribulations of his women, however, have Mahendra, Asha, Bihari and Binodini and its been expressed with rare insight and sympathy. action centers round the mental conflict of all of The character of at least half a dozen loving them. The main interest of the novel lies in the wives has been drawn by Rabindranath. Woman search ofthe individual personality. Mahendra is is regarded by Tagore as the source of useless and lacks self control, yet he is lucky to primordial energy of the universe. A woman is win the loving devotion of his wife, Asha. not merely the creation of God but she is alsothe Binodini is a young widow whose wishes have creation of man who gives her with beauty from not been fulfilled. Mahendra is attracted by her the depth of his heart. Rabindranath searches but she spurns him. Soon he becomes conscious deep into the hearts of women and cuts open of his folly and returns to his wife shame-faced their inner-most emotions. His woman and crest-fallen. characters are never static and not the products Asha is drawn as to replace Binodini. She is of only artistic control or handling. We find an turned into self-dependent personality, having important growth in them. They grow from undergone bitter experiences and immense being emotional to becoming quiet and peaceful. suffering. Asha is a peaceful, meek, attractive Tagore has also displayed the women tolerating and innocent woman. She belongs to the and undergoing untold troubles and sufferings. conventional type of Hindu women who worship Rabindranath had a sympathy and regard for the their husbands. She is the representative of those conventional women. As Rukmini Dev Arundale women who have faith that the husband can do says: no wrong. She is an example of innocent and “In the home he elevated the Indian Woman for simple minded woman who can be cheated both whom he had great regards. From my many by her husband and by the people around her. meetings with him I could perceive that he had Through the character of Asha, Tagore indicates far greater admiration for the unsophisticated how bitter sorrows, difficulties and sufferings and uneducated woman than for the modern girls can change a simple, artless and impractical who were becoming foreign to their country woman into a shrewd and capable mistress of through wrong education and ideas.”1 the household, commanding respect from one Conventional women are those connecting with and all. Indian convention; conveyed from ancestors to Asha should love Mahendra so devotedly, would descendants. Tradition is:“The word ‘ tradition’ wonder many people who do not know Indian means etymologically ‘handling over’ the life. The faithfulness woman in a case like this conception of tradition, therefore, implies, (a) a is the loyalty of Savitri, Sita and Damyanti, ‘deposit’ which is handed over, and (b) cared for their husband. Asha’s position must be ‘depositories’ i.e. persons who are in possession that of many a women in life, her first designs of the deposit and are commissioned to preserve literature being Sita and Shakuntla. Tagore had it and transmit it to successors.”2 in mind women like Asha when he said: Orthodox is also some what of same type. “The husband was all in all the husband was the Orthodox,“means a form of religious belief and dearest object of love the husband was divine.”6 practice that adheres most strictly to ancient Asha is an orphan, brought up by her uncle tradition. Orthodox is also applied to a certain Ankul Babu of Shyam Bazar. Asha’s aunt type of protestantism that is usually quite Annapurna who has Asha’s welfare at heart conservative in its interpretation of scripture.”3 thinks of Bihari as the prospective husband but Thus, the handing down of options, principles, all her plans go away due to Mahendra’s practices, rites and customs from ancestors to persistence on marrying Asha. Asha is thought coming generation is tradition. This convention to be as a perfect example of virtue. She is handed down from age to age by oral generates a favourable impression on both communication. Tagore’s women in this Bihari and Mahendra. Mahendra is so attracted category are those who used to live in Purdah. of her sweet position that he readily transforms Husband was the image of God for them and his previous decision of postponing his their home was the temple. Tagore displayed marriage. He is even prepared to oppose his these women to show the then condition of mother and break his friendship with Bihari in Bengal and also how they used to suffer. He order to marry her.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Asha is an example of conventional daughter-in- hatred he deserves as: “She could no longer law of a joint family. She becomes the prey to worship as a God, the husband who had typical Hindu mother-in-law who controls the degraded the purity of Married life.”10 house. Tagore tells us through her that early Here she gives his image “to the turbid waters of marriage used to generate so many problems in Binodini’s dark passion as Hindu devotees the life of girls. Asha is totally negligent of the consign the image of Goddess Durga to the ways to make happy the mother-in-law and river.”11 control the house. She ignores her household Asha who was just like shadow of her husband duties to spend time with her husband who now refuses to make any effort to win back the involves in love-making, ignoring his medical affection of her husband. She distinguishes from studies. He always keeps her in his room on the Rajyalaksmi in the belief that it is, “the duty of pretension of educating her. Upto this moment the wives to keep them (husband) to the strait Mahendra fulfills that saying of Tagore, when he path.”12 says, “O women, you are not merely the Asha does not waste her time in self-pity; rather handiwork of God but also of Man; these are she improves her reading and writing. She who ever endowing you with beauty from their could hardly read Charupath, the Bangali hearts.”7 Both Rajyalakshmi and Annapurna are primer, now reads novels and journals with surprise at this behaviour of Asha. Annapurna interest. satires Mahendra: Rabindranath was a freat appreciator of such “Would you rather have her as a modern girl, simple women. He was of the view that a time lazily lounging about the whole day, reading will come for women to rise. Through Asha he novels, or doing fancy knitting; waited upon by shows that circumstances change the personality others?8 of human being. Women is that soil to which it It seems women had no right of reading or doing is man who shapes accordingly. Asha attends on other works except that of coocking and her mother-in-law when she is ill. When household works. Tagore shows that in a family Mahendra asks her jokingly whether he has to the whole draw-back was considered that of learn medicines from her, she reples acutely woman. Man’s mistakes were pardonable, but saying, “Not medicine but solicitude for your that of woman’s used to generate havoc. In the mother, you may well learn from me.”13 Such a same way, Asha’s mother-in-law Rajyalakshmi rejoinder from a simple and innocent woman is troubled by Asha, leaves for her village and shocking for Mahendra. Asha has a rare force of Annapurna leaves for Kashi. character. She even does not allow Mahendra to Asha stands in acute contrast with Kamala of enter the room saying:“Let Bihari Thakurpo The Wreck as she is not expert in household come and see her first. Whether he advises, shall duties. She is similar to Hemnalini of the same be done.”14 novel. Like Hemnalini, she is alert of and Now, when Asha becomes somewhat extrovert, troubled by her lack of capabilties. Rajyalakshmi she is able to form a true guess regarding Bihari, returns bringing Binodini along with her. Tagore converting her former hatred for him. Bihari also shows how some women in that age used to be notices that Asha:“Was no longer a raw young so innocent and simple-minded. Asha girl, the baptism of sorrow had made her ageless is also the same as she can not understand the like the paragons of Chaste womanhood, of risks of having another woman in the house. She which the legend speak.”15 immaturely introduces Binodini to her husband. Asha though modified in the conventional type, As Rahyalakshmi Later remarks:-“But for her still has an individuality of her own. Tagore (Asha) silliness, Mahendra would never have shows those women who serve their husbands fallen into Binodini’s clutches.”9 faithfully and devotedly, but the moment they Asha is that type of conventional Indian woman prove to be unfaithful, they throw their divine who is retiring and shy and cannot mix freely image into the morbid waters and make no with others. Asha is a queen of emotions and effort. These women have motherly affection calm woman unlike Binodini. Her husband is all and concern for their husbands and spend their in all for her. That’s why she is unable to notice life in attending to their desires and serving them the weaknesses of his character and in her without any hope of return. Their devotion innocence, she lets Binodini look after her verges almost on idolatory. It is in tune with the husband during her absence so that he is not put conventional belief that Pative Protyaksha to any unease. Similarly, she fails to understand Deivam (Husband is the God before their eyes). the cunningness of her mother-in-law, who A great writer’s idea of womanhood is always a encourages Binodini to attract Mahendra. real and sure test of his art. Woman is the The turning point in Asha’s character comes guardian of the emotional and spiritual factors of when she reads the letter of Binodini to her the race. She has the godly gisfts of sympathy husband admonishing him. Here emerges a new and intuition. Tagore has explained the true woman unlike previous Asha. After the flirtation graces of womanhood with regard and love. of her husband with Binodini, she does not Tagore tried to focus the attention of the society allow herself to break down under the on the condition of widows in joint families, complexity. Now, she tells her position in the who are economically exploited and avoided house. She wins the love and sympathy of her from other comforts. These widows abound in mother-in-law. She treats her husband with the most of his novels. They generally play a small

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 but important role in the growth of the plot. “…..Our real and ultimate commerce is not with Harimohini of Gora and Annapurna of Binodini each other but with him who is the supreme are of this category. These are orthodox type of giver and the supreme taker.”20 characters. These widows follow the trend which She, thus, advises Asha to accept all the stresses has been founded by society for them. These and strains from Mahendra. Every woman has widows do not take part in the ceremonial the seeds of motherly love and affection in her functions or other important affairs of the family heart, so is Annapurna. Her love for Bihari is or of the world. real unlike that of Rajyalakshmi. Annapurna Annapurna of the novel Binodini is widowed at shows her anger only once when Bihari visits the tender age of eleven and has only a shadowy her at Kashi. She is carried away by Asha’s memory of her huband. This is in an attack on mistaken fear that Bihari has pursued her to the early marriage of that time. Being a childless Kashi with a wrong intention, and does not widow, Annapurna is subjected to much insult welcome him when he calls on her. However, and sufferings. She has lived in the house of her she is quick to make amends when she learns the sister-in-law; Rajyalakshmi. She tolerates her truth about Bihari’s visit. suffereing with good grall, has faith in God and Unlike Harimohini of Gora, Annapurna is self- becomes separate in her outlook. Both Mahendra effacing, selfless and kind-hearted woman who and Bihari are very fond of her. She rises out to lives for the sake of others. She is not a woman be a pure character under the heat of sufferings. who depends on false honour. Though she is Tagore is also of the view:“For women, the path orthodox and conventional, yet she never applies of life’s true realization is the welfare of all. The her rules on evreybody like that of Harinohini. world may be full of joy and full of sorrow – the Annapurana is a pure and worthy character. She virtuous and chaste woman will accept it all and accepts bygones as bygones and attends on the make it her chief religious duty, to give form to sick Rajyalakshmi to bring comfort and ease to her religion in her home.”16 her sister-in-law who has been undergoing great Annapurana position becomes unjealous when mental torture due to her son’s flirtation with Mahendra marries her niece, Asha much against Binodini. Annapurna plays her small part in the the desires of his mother. Annapurna herself is final compromise of Asha and Mahendra. not in favour of this marriage as she feels that Rabindranath Tagore is really one of India’s Bihari would be a more suitable match for Asha. greatest social fore-runners and had addressed The situation is further raised by Asha, who by himself to many of the problems of the newly her incapability to manage the house suffers the disclosing India. In the novel, The Wreck, he has feelings of her mother-in-law. Rajyalakshmi shown the disadvantages of arranged marraige who is a unique mother-in-law considers and also how sometimes a small event can bring Annapurna responsible for all this. But misfortune to the life and career of characters. Annapurna is such a nice character that she tries Tagore’s women characters are always to become less important of herself to the conflicting against their dehumanization, in the background in all matters concerning Asha, name of convention. Tagore, in fact, gives a Mahendra and Rajyalakshmi. She faithfully central place to women in his novels because expressed to her: their roles are significant to any change of “She is your daughter-in-law. You may guide Indian ethos. Through a variety of views, her, punish her, as you like, why bring me in.”17 Tagore displays their search for identity or Further, Annapurna rightly expresses her realization of self-fulfillment within the limits of position in the house when she tells Asha, convention and society. His behaviour towards “Chunni, you’ve made my life a hell. I can ‘Anglicized dolls’ and their senseless neither stay here in peace nor go elsewhere.”18 traditionalism is consistent with his behaviour Unable to adjust to the stressful atmosphere of towards all cultural importations, namely that the house, Annapurna leaves for Kashi, to spend whatever was brought should be fully her life on the sacred banks of the river Ganga. understood and put to none but proper uses. She feels it essential for their family peace and Kamla, heroine of the novel The Wreck is a happiness. unique orthodox Hindu girl who has all the Annapurna’s absence from home gave Binodini capabilities of a good housewife. Kamla is a full chance to enchant Mahendra. Being Asha’s simple, calm and attaractive girl of fourteen. aunt, she would have done something to revert She is the perfect image of the Goddess the complexity that befalls her. Tagore shows Lakshmi. Nalinaksha believes that she is the that such women had been very undestined loveliest girl he has ever seen. Uncle throughout their lives. Even their love and Chakraborti feels that Kamla has such a sweet services used to bring unhappiness for them. position that every one who sees her surrenders Annapurna is also known to this fact. As she to her attraction. She has all the capabilities says to Asha: needed to make her an ideal house wife. “…..rebuff awaited me at every step and finally Kamla’s behaviours, motivations and attitude I came to the desperate conclusion that my are formed by the cultural environment in which whole life had been a waste and futility.”19 she has been brought up. An orphaned village She further realises: girl, her wedding is suddenly arranged by her miserly uncle to a complete stranger as no dowry is demanded. As she later recounts to

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Sailaja, she felt too shy to look at the wife Tagore shows that Hindu girls afford their love during the marraige: for the abstract idea of the husband and not any “You see I was almost past the marrying age, solid personality. This is true of the time the than all of a sudden a marriage was arranged for novel displays it not of modern days. Only for a one and other girls teased me dreadfully. So just moment does Kamla think of committing suicide to know other I did not consider myself by drowning herself in Ganga, but soon decides extraordinarily lucky in getting a husband at my to find out her true husband whose name is age, I never even glanced at him. I actually went disclosed in the acceptance of Ramesh who had the length of thinking it immodest and fallen by chance in her hands. Kamla’s self- unbecoming to take the least interest in him, confidence in this regard reverbrates in these even in my thoughts.”21 words: Tagore described Kamla most successfully how “If I would be a true wife to him I must live to the Hindu girls feel intensely attached to their prostrate myself at his feet. Nothing will rob me husbands even before they know, with whom, of this guerdon. While life endures he is not lost they were to be married. As he declares in to me. The Lord has preserved me from death Creative Unity: that I may serve him.”25 “What I have felt in the woman of India is the Here Kamla is a true display of Tagore’s views consciousness of this ideal – their simple faith in when he says: the sanctity of devotion lighted by love which is “Women folk know only one man upon the earth held to be divine.”22 – him whom they love, and never think of other Unlike Asha, Kamla is very much expert in men’s deserts. That there may be many whose every work. As Ramesh takes notice of this merits deserve regard, is not recorded in the expertness in cooking and household scriptures of women. The only good man and the management while on their way to Ghazipur by only object of woman’s favours is he who has motor launch on the river Ganga. He is wonder blabbered into her ears the matrimonial struck by her neatness, expertise and the incantations.”26 cheerful alacrity with which she went about her Kamla, born and brought up in the conventional duties. Rabindranath also praises this expertise Hindu orthodox family has implied all the in woman when he says: qualities of the Pativarta. She has Sita and “Whenever there is something which is Savitri as her ideals. Her confidence, patience concretely personal or human, there is woman’s and unflinching devotion makes Bimanbehari world. The domestic world is the world where Majumdar draw a comparison with, every individual finds his worth as an individual “…...Uma of Kalidas’s Kumar Sambhavam. She therefore his value is not the market value but became prepared to face all kinds of hardship, the value of love. This domestic world has been humiliation and austerities with a view to the gift of God to woman.”23 serving her husband, whom she had never Kamla has not been trained by a conventional seen.”27 mother-in-law or loving mother and has not had With the help of her love and devotion, she any chance at her uncle’s house to see how a succeeds in searching her real husband. The husband behaves towards his wife. She is kind of appreciation, amounting to almost confused and pained by Ramesh’s reservedness idolatry which a Hindu wife is conventionally towards her. But as a self-effacing Hindu wife, regarded as showing to her husband, is disclosed she submits her feelings and unquestioningly when Kamla sets her eyes for the first time on obeys his whims. But during their stay at uncle Nalinaksha: Chakraborti’s house at Ghazipur, she becomes “She threw her whole soul into her gaze till it fully alert of the unique relationship between her seemed that its magnetic attraction must draw and Ramesh as it is thrown into quick contrast Nalinaksha into the focus of her being. The light with the happy close married life of Sailaja, the shone on his lofty brow and composed features. Uncle’s daughter. Kamla’s power of observation Every lineament stamped and impressed itself and analytical thinking are remarkable. She on Kamla’s heart till her entire frame grew understands that her “wedded life was a mere benumbed and appeared to melt into encircling pencil outline incomplete in parts and totally space. There was nothing before her save his uncoloured.”24Kamla is displayed as a contrast face in the circle of light. All else was unreal, to Ramesh in her clear thinking, preseverance, everything around it seemed to fade away and strong will power and determined behaviour. resolve itself into that one countenance.”28 Unlike Ramesh, she is never perplexed by crisis With the support of uncle Chakraborti, she and does the right thing at the right moment. She entered into Nalinaksha’s house as ‘Haridasi’. comes to know from a letter that Ramesh had She is a true example of ideal and unique Hindu searched that she was not his wife and was in wife. Her love and praise of her husband is like reality in love with another woman. But he had the Atmasamarpana of a devotee to Lord. She is not been able to decide the involvement that so self-disappearing that she never goes out of fortune had brought about. As an orthodox the way to disclose her identity to Nalinkasha, Hindu lady she is shocked that she had calmly even when his mother tries to arrange his accepted him to be her husband and was marriage with Hemnalini. But in the end, with preparing to be with her. At that moment, shame the support of Hemanlini, she is lastly united penetrated her heart like a dagger. with Nalinaksha.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Among all the characters of the novel, Kamla is skilled in embroidery, knitting and sewing and the most interesting, lively and full blooded. She learnt modern hair styles from an English lady. excels all the other conventional heroines of Kashemankari’s powers of perception and Tagore like Asha, Sharmila etc., by her quality critical analysis are remarkable. Hemnalini is of sobriety, self-control and self-disapperance. wondered at the critical comments and The psychological issue of her character is observations of Kashemankari on the Bengali summed up by M.M. Bhattacharjee: novels she reads out to her. Though she leads having beliefs and hard life, she forbids her son “Can a Hindu wife who has never seen her to give her example as she believes that undue husband and under peculiar circumstances, has persistence on custom is unbecoming of men. come to look upon another as such and adored Tagore also says in favour of such women: him sincerely foe swear her love and transfer it automatically to the former when she knows the “The altar at which woman may be truly truth? It is likely that love and the conventional worshipped is her place as mother, the seat of idea of fidelity to marriage ties will have equal the pure, right minded lady of the house.”31 weight with her and the conflict will end in Kashemankari also does not approve of the tragedy.”29 simplicity and hard life of young Hemnalini. She Tagore believes that such women can bring the tells her: much needed stabilty to uneasy domestic world “At your age you should be enjoying life controlled by men. thoroughly. You should be thinking of clothes Kashemankari, mother-in-law of Kamla is and amusements instead of religions.”32 another orthodox character of the novel, The Wreck. She is the representative of the early Such women were having beliefs because they twentieth century orthodox women, to whom were brought up in an environment of purity. ceremonial purity and religion was of utmost Kashemankari is the example of unique Indian significance. She is the fore-runner of woman who always lets others know that their Anadamoyi. She resembles the latter in her spirit son is not an ordinary man. In the whole range of indepenendence, keen sense of perception and and gamut of Tagore’s women, Kashemankari is wide outlook. a rare type, a combination of an orthodox way of Kashemankari is the wife of Rajaballabh, a life, polished taste and free out-look. Further, landlord. They have a son Nalinaksha. she is an extreme example of women, “who Kashemankari is having generally accepted preferred to sacrifice their husbands for the sake belief and having fears woman who forcefully of what they considered their religious duty.”33 observes all conventional customs. She is the Thus, by displaying such conventional and representative of those strong willed women orthodox characters, Tagore sometimes praises who do not compromise with their husbands in some of their ways and sometimes he shows the matter of religion. Her husband joins the emptiness of customs. Like-through Brahmo-Samaj at the age of thirty but she denies Kashemankari he wants to show that whole to leave the Hindu fold and follow him. adaptation of orthodox customs is harmful, at Rajaballabh relaxed by this rebuff remarries times we should become free according to the Brahmo widow. Thereupon Kashemankari time or age or situation. He shows the harms of leaves her home and settles down in the holy arranged marriage. Women used to suffer city of Banaras. In Banaras she leads a life of because of this. But through Annapurna and purity. She is the type of woman who gives Asha and Kamla he shows the purity and utmost significance to ceremonial purity. As she simplicity of those women. He had a great does not take food or water given by non- respect for such women. As Mary M. Lags says: orthodox Hindus, her son Nalinaksha cooks for “The women for whom he shows sympathy and her whenever she is ill. She observes all admiration are generally unsophisticated, customs and ceremonial purity of having beliefs patiently acquiescent in their isolated role, until of Hinduism. some drastic change in family circumstances Beneath the conservative exterior, however, is a brings them up short at the realization of an large and free heart and a modern mind. She intolerable situation.”34 herself proposes Hemalini as a bride for her son Among the widows displayed by Rabindranath though the girl is Brahmo. One surprises how Tagore in his novels, Bara Rani or Mejo Rani, Kashemankari, who had denied to accpet the the sister-in-law of Bimla, in The Home and the religion of her husband when he became a World is an influential character. She is in a Brahmo, now proposes a Brahmo girl to her son. class of herself, being neither cunning like We can understand that she is free and tolerant Rajyalakshmi in Binodini nor cultured and only with regard to her son. So, Bimanbehari dignified like Yogmaya in Farewell, My Friend. Majumdar doubts:“…… the estrangement from She is young, intelligent and critically observant her husband culminating in his marriage with a of the psychological struggles Bimla was widow, gave a rude shock to her, she became passing through. So, in this respect, she is more tolerant and liberal in her views.”30 similar to Annapurna of Binodini. Just as Besides all this, Kashemankari is an expert of art Annapurna is concerned about the welfare on and keeps her home neat and clean, a trial which her niece, Asha, Bara Rani is also concerned is rare in women of her kind. Further, she is about the welfare of her brother-in-law, Nikhil.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

She was the first to see Bimla tending to towards jealous of these ties between us, reaching back Sandip. She told Bimla’s husband “upto now the to our childhood.”40 women of this house have been kept weeping. Critics have indicated that the fact displays Here comes the men’s turn.”35 She plays a himself in Nikhilesh. According to Biman considerable role throughout the novel. Her wise Behari Majumdar:“The analysis of Nikhilesh’s remarks give the much needed comic relief in relation to the Mejo Rani reveals nature of the the novel as it is full of worries and emotional poet’s relation to Kadambari Devi. The green conflicts. She provides a relation between the mango which he used to pick up for the latter reader and the major characters. According to has become the Amara in the novel.”41 Biman Behari Majumdar, “She plays the part of Bara Rani appears to be money-minded by the chorus in Greek drama offering comments continuously reminding Nikhil to deposit her on the events which were taking place.”36 share of money in the bank. But Nikhil knows Her affection to Nikhilesh, however, was real. that her concern for the money “did not proceed She was married at the age of nine, while from any sordid worldliness”.42 She is such a Nikhilesh was six years of age. They had played well-informed person that she knows the danger together. She was angry with Bimla due to of having heavy amounts of money at home in carelessness to Nikhilesh with biting satire. She those politically troubled days. Again, she is told her: well alert of tendency of doing something about “What a wonderful hospitable Chota Rani we Bimla’s political mentors. have! Her guest absolutely will not budge. In our After the burglary at the treasury and the time there used to be guests, too, but they had threatening letters received by Nikhil, Bara Rani not such lavish looking after…... poor brother is more concerned not about her money but Nikhil is paying the penalty of being born too about Nikhil’s life, whose affection for her was modern.”37 like that of Lakshmana for Rama. Being an alert observer, she notices Bimla’s The few drawbacks that Bimla notices in Bara involvement with Sandip. Rani are her low taste and the low company she Her humour is not only hearty but also well keeps. She is not a termagant and dangerous timed. She makes a proper comment in a word woman. Her remarks and asides about Bimla are or two that is right in the context. The day Bimla no doubt sarcastic but not vindictive. dressed up quickly to receive Sandip, Bara Rani Through the characters of Bara Rani, Binodini, quips, “Whither away Chota Rani? ……So Annapurna and Rajyalakshmi, Tagore shows the early! A matinee…….”38 problems of the widows in joint families and the In the same way, when Nikhil receives jealousies and small quarrels between sisters-in- threatening letters from the followers of Sandip, law. The clashes between Bimla and Bara Rani that they would loot the treasury, she mocks at are due to the generation gap between them. Bimla: But Bara Rani has a number of unique habits “I was advising brother Nikhil to seek your which are not common to widows. Being the protecting, call off your minions, Robber Queen! daughter-in-law of a Rajah’s family, she has led We will offer sacrifices to your Bande Matram if a comfortable life. She has the habit of chewing you will but save us.”39 betal nuts and gossiping with women of all Bara Rani has such a keen insight into the kinds. Even when she goes to live on the banks working of other women’s minds that she calls of holy Ganga, she takes with her a pack of Bimla “Robber Queen” much before Bimla playing cards. steals her money to pay Sandip. Her bitter Nikhil understands the unique situation in which remarks are without hatred as she is truly Bara Rani is placed. He tells Bimla that “Bara concerned about Nikhil’s happiness. She is so Rani had been hurt at every turn and yet had not sensitive that she cannot tolerate to see Nikhil’s the right to complain.”43 He blames the social set sad unsmiling face. She cannot bear to think of up for the revengeful and bad-tempered nature living alone in the house when Nikhil decides to of the widows. He poses the question, “Has not shift his family to Calcutta. She resolves to the pressure of the society cramped them into follow them to Calcutta and assures Nikhil that pettiness and crookedness.”44 He feels that “they she will not fight with Chota Rani at the new are but pawns of the fate which gambles with place. With his piercing insight and analytical them.”45 These words of Nikhil disclose power he recorded in his diary: Tagore’s concern and sympathy for widow. “I could see at once that the little differences she In rural areas, there were no facilities for mass used to have with Bimla about money matters, education, except of a basic type. But the whole did not proceed from any sordid worldliness but country was backward in education. Tols and because she felt that her claims in regard to this Madarsas which were in a maribund condition one relationship of her life had been overridden were looked down upon as archaic and were and its ties weakened for her by the coming in completely out of touch with modern advance between of this other woman from goodness knowledge. Study of science was unknown, knows where! She had been hurt at every turn though Ayurvedic and Unani systems of and yet had not been the right to complain. And medicine were practised extensively. The charge Bimla? She also had felt that Bara Rani’s claim imputed against the indigenous educational over me was not based merely on our social system by Raja Ram Mohan Roy who advocated connection but went much deeper; and she was

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 the introduction of western culture, was that it mortals and steals the peace from their hearts. escaped science and was barren and useless. Then comes Lakshmi, her eyes glistering with Even admission to Tols was generally confined tears of affection. She soothes the passions and to Brahmins and therefore higher education, restores the serene joys of autumn, autumn with such as was then available was the monopoly of its fruitful maturity and repose. Her blessings a few. People were, thus, divided into a handful bring perfection and plenty, and her gentle smile of enlightened Sanskritists on the one hand and overflows with the nectar of grace.”46 the numberless rejected masses on the other. No For the first time, Rabindranath introduced a educated middle-class existed – it was the heroine, who dared to sail for Europe alone for product of British Rule and of its educational doing higher studies in medicine. But more policy. There was also the economic division important than that was the display of a conjugal into rich landlords and businessmen and life controlled by the wife. We have already penniless agriculturists and tenants inculding noticed that in Binodini, Asha saw her husband generally even Brahmin Sanskritists. Rejection ignoring his studies and yet could not ask him to had produced whims and often cruel customs change his course of action. Both Anandamoyi such as child marriage, social inequality of and Barodasundrari in Gora were elderly women, ban against sea-voyage, untouchability matrons but they appear to have exercised little and caste discrimination. Suttee had just been impression on their respective husbands. It is finished by British Government on the advice of note-worthy that Rabindranath in this big novel enlightened Indians and widow remarriage does not introduce a single scene where legalised. But lots of social evils against which Barodasundari is having a private talk with her legislation was impossible long continued. There husband with regard to the various problems were no railways or steamer-services. Roads facing their household. were few and laid through forests and marshly “The poet’s father Maharshi Devendranath was land, which were the haunts of looters. so masterful a personality that Sarada Devi, the Yogmaya is the last of widows drawn by mother of the poet, is not known to have ever Rabindranath Tagore. She is more modern, dared to give any counsel to him. Once she in liberal-minded and sophisticated than the other the pride of her wealth, had said that she would widows. She represents the new type of not allow her daughter-in-law, wife of widows. Her husband died at the age of twenty Satyendranath Tagore, to visit her father so long seven, leaving behind him, two children, a girl as the letter would continue to live in rented and a boy in charge of his wife. Her father was a house in Calcutta. When Devendranath heared large-hearted aristocrat but her husband turned a of this he said that the daughter-in-law would go reactionary Hindu, who could afford to maintain to her mother even if she happened to live under a court pandit to explain the scriptures and the the shade of a tree.”47 philosophical works of Hinduism to her. It is no need to add that his opinion prevailed. Age has given Yogmaya grandeur and not In Sarmila, the maternal instinct is pre- weakness. She appoints Labanya as tutor to her dominant: nothing makes her happy as much as daughter, Surama. Yogmaya’s heart is full of “Mothering” – her husband because she thinks motherly affection. This is the reason Amit is him as “utterly helpless and pathetically drawn towards her, in their first meeting. No one incapable of looking after his own physical fails to notice her gentle and calm smile. needs – this impression was too firmly rooted in She took pleasure in promoting the love affair Sarmila’s mind to be ever dislodged. Her love is between Labanya and Amit. Her personality of an assuaging kind and she has all the could not but bring the honourable homage from attributes traditionally associated with Hindu all with whom she came in contact. She womanhood: befitting modesty, selfless represents the new type of widows who did not devotion, sacrificial spirit and disappearance. care to spend a lonely life inside the limits of the Sarmila is the eldest of the two daughters of Zenana or at a holy place. Rajaram Babu, a very rich man of Barisal. She Rabindranath’s vision was far reaching, his has nothing in common with her noisy and instincts were unerring, his sense of reality was sportive younger sister, Urmila who belongs to keen. He was fully alive to the drawbacks in the the beloved kind. She is a homely beauty, with path of life of widows. They were condemned to large, gentle eyes and steady looks. She is soft lead their life in the lonely portions of house. spoken, graceful, wise and intelligent. Unlike The dual image of woman as mother and her comfort loving sister, she is serious, duty- beloved – a premise already projected by him in minded and believes in the principle of “Work is symbolic form in his poem entitled, Two Worship”. women: Sarmila’s father was a highly educated man with “When the primeval ocean was churned, liberal views. He trained her up to be self- Two divine forms emerged from the endless dependent and got her married to Sasanka after deep: one was Urvashi queen of the passion, he had taken his M.SC. degree. The expenses of temptress of the gods. The other was Lakshmi the engineering education of Sasanka were maternal and pure benefactress of all that lives borne by his father-in-law. and breaths. Urvashi brings with her the heady There is no element of his existence, whether at wine of April and bursts into the restless songs home or in office which avoids her attention and of youth. Her flaming revelry distracts all

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 solicitude. At times he chafes at this rigid 8. Rabindranath Tagore, Binodini, Trans. ordering of his life and shows: Krishna Kripalani, New Delhi: Sahitya “For goodness’ sake, get hold of some god or Akademi, 1959, p.14. deity like that Chakravorty wife. It’s too much 9. Ibid., p.174. for me to withstand your attentions all by 10. Ibid., pp.172-73. myself. Sharing them with a god would make it 11. Ibid., p.173. easier. The gods can stand excesses, but man is 12. Ibid., p.174. frail.”48 13. Ibid., p.182. Sarmila is aware that even in love, men will not 14. Ibid., p.219. lose their ego and self-respect. And for this 15. Ibid., pp.202-03. reason, she is not wondered when her husband 16. N.B. Sen, Glorious Thoughts of Tagore, returns the money he had taken from her to set p.252. up the business. Further, she believes that 17. Rabindranath Tagore, Binodini, p.16. success in work brings self-confidence in a man. 18. Ibid., p.22. She feels that it is quite natural for a man to 19. Ibid., p.123. ignore his wife when he is indulged in business. 20. Ibid., p.123. She, therefore, is not hurt when Sasanka neglects 21. Rabindranath Tagore, The Wreck, trans. her when she is sick. She relaxes his cruel J.G. Drummond, London: Macmillan, behaviour towards her since he is too deeply 1921, rpt. Madras: Macmillan, 1975, indulged in making his career a “tower of pp.348-49. triumph” and wishes him well in the pursuit of 22. Rabindranath Tagore, Creative Unity, the “call of glory” Madras: Macmillan pp.348-349. Another example of Sarmila’s keen insight is her 23. G.C. Misra, “Tagore on Women”, The correct estimate of the motives of Urmi’s fiancé Genius of Tagore: Tagore Centenary Nirad. When everyone praises him highly, she Volume, Mahendra Kulasreshta, alone rightly perceives his selfish intentions and Hoshiarpur: V.V.R. Institute states: “Let’s see how long these heroics last.”49 Publication, 1961, p.195. Sarmila is a woman in the conventional mould 24. Rabindranath Tagore, The Wreck, and worships her husband with great devotion. p.179. She is the rare type of selfless, self- 25. Ibid., pp.310-11. disappearing woman. She pardons her husband, 26. N.B. Sen, Glorious Thoughts of Tagore, his elopement with her sister on realizing that p.252. she has not made him happy. She even asks her 27. Biman Behari Majumdar, Heroines of husband to marry her sister with whom he is in Tagore, Calcutta: Firma, K.L. love. In this respect she differs from Niraja (The Mukhopadhyay, 1968, p.220. Garden). 28. Rabindranath Tagore, The Wreck, Tagore looked at women and the world from p.325. more points of view than anyone. Though not a 29. M.M. Bhattacharjee, Rabindranath stickler for logical presentation, symmetrical Tagore, Poet and Thinker, Allahad: arrangement and exactness of expression, Kitab Mahal, 1961, p.96. Tagore has left a message which must appeal to 30. Bimanbehari Majumdar, Heroines of Indians for ages to come and also to non- Tagore, p.221. Indians in an epoch torn by dissension and 31. N.B. Sen, Glorious Thoughts of Tagore, struggle and perturbed by sick hurry and divided p.251. aims. 32. Rabindranath Tagore, The Wreck, p.293. References 33. Bimanbehari Majumdar, Heroines of 1. Rukmini Devi Arundale, “Tagore and Tagore, p.221. Indian Culture”, Rabindranath: A 34. Marry M. Lags, Rabindranath Tagore, Centenary Volume, 1861-1961, ed. S. University of Mirsouri, Columbia: Radhakrishnan New Delhi: Sahitya Twayne publishers, 1976, p.99. Akademi, 1961, p.75. 35. Rabindranath Tagore, Home and the 2. Encyclopedia of Religion and Ethics, World, trans. Surendranath Tagore, Vol. XII. London: Macmillan, 1919, p.55. 3. “Orthodox”, Encyclopedia Britanica – 36. Biman Behari Majumdar, Heroines of VII, 1768. Tagore, p.133. 4. N.B. Sen, Glorious Thoughts of Tagore, 37. Rabindranath Tagore, Home and the New Delhi: New book Society of India, World, pp. 84-85. 1965, p. 251. 38. Ibid., p.88. 5. Krishna Kripalani, Rabindranath 39. Ibid., p.195. Tagore: A Biography, London: Oxford 40. Ibid., p.260. University Press, 1962, p.188. 41. Biman Behari Majumdar, Heroines of 6. N.B. Sen, Glorious Thoughts of Tagore, Tagore, p.134. p.102. 42. Rabindranath Tagore, Home and the 7. Ibid., p.249. World, p.260. 43. Ibid., p.260.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

44. Ibid., p.16. 45. Ibid., p.16. 46. Quoted from G.V. Raj, Tagore: The Novelist, New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 1983, p.82. 47. Quoted from Beman Behari Majumdar, Heroines of Tagore, pp66, in Indira Devi – Puratani, pp. 21-22. 48. Rabindranath Tagore, Two Sisters, trans. Krishna Kirpalani, Calcutta: Visva Bharti, 1945, p. 9. 49. Ibid., p.48.

INFORMATION FLOOD AND ITS MANAGEMENT IN DIGITAL ERA

Saurabh Lohia Research Scholar, DLIS, MPBOU, Bhopal (M. P.) Email: [email protected]

Dr. Sunil Singh Chandel Documentation officer M.P. Institute of Social Science Research, Ujjain-456010 (M.P.) Email: [email protected]

ABSTRACT: During the time of the last century one could observe how the use of information is changed. At the beginning of the 20th century the most of the information resources were available offline and online resources were very few but today’s scenario is changed and a number of information resources is available online and offline both. While observing the scenario today we notice a total change in working of libraries. The persons who are in the information and knowledge providing sector have more technically skilled than earlier. This paper describes a new approach of information management in

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 libraries of different organizations. Further this precisely describes the advantages and disadvantages of some existing systems. Apart from that we will explain the basic concepts of information. INTRODUCTION: qualifies Information technology as a natural Information is regarded as a valuable resource medium to handle the flow of knowledge. which should be managed like other resources, The main aims of information management in and should contribute directly to accomplishing libraries is knowledge sharing and provide organisational goals and objectives. Information information services to its users. Resources Management provides an integrated Grant gives a definition on what view for managing the entire life-cycle of knowledge is. This definition is always information, from generation, to dissemination, subjective and depends on the point of view and to archiving and/or destruction, for maximizing the area of research one is situated. Grant the overall usefulness of information, and defined knowledge management as “Knowledge improving service delivery and program is always fixed to memory and arises through management. the processing of perceived information in our Information Resources Management views brain. A requirement for the processing in our information and Information Technology as an brain is that contexts, which have been integrating factor in the organization that is, the important for the development in the history of various organisational positions that manage the system, are available. The associations of information are coordinated and work together perceived relevant information with available toward common ends. Further, IRM looks for contexts or experiences are building the end ways in which the management of information product of the learning process, in which data is and the management of Information Technology being registered as information and is being are interrelated, and fosters that interrelationship learned as new knowledge.” and organizational integration. INFORMATION MANAGEMENT Information Resources Management includes ASPECTS : the management of: Information Management and Informatics:  The broad range of information All the work carried out in the field of resources, e.g., printed materials, informatics focuses on the use of information electronic information, and microforms, and telecommunication applications, considering  The various technologies and equipment knowledge management aspects. The that manipulate these resources, and complexity of knowledge and its requirements to  The people who generate, organize, and handle it perfectly exceed the possibilities in that disseminate those resources. sector of informatics at the moment. On the Overall the intent of management of information other hand a lot of new technologies have resources is to increase the usefulness of been developed which are succeeding in government information both to the government individual fields of knowledge management. and to the public. In last century, many Database systems, applications of artificial inventions in the information industry were intelligence, the principle of the object made so that the need for physical work became orientation, data mining and other knowledge less important. Now the work process can be tools are some examples of useful done by fewer people with the help of computers implementations in the certain branch of and internet. knowledge management. These tools support Information Management beside the communication aspects the storage To introduce the concepts of information and the distribution of knowledge. management we should have a look at how Strategy research, Business Practice and humans try to understand complex Information Management: The continuing innovations. When humans try to understand increased dynamic of competition makes it non- transparent-facts they mostly use necessary to rethink actual success strategies. abstraction and differentiation so that the Different technologies grow together and the facts are understandable for everybody. The increased relevance of information and history of information management was communication technologies cause shorter determined by practical and theoretical points production cycles and let arise hybrid products. of views. The theoretical approach was Even new competition sectors like E-commerce defined by many debates about information come into existence. The global spread out while the practical approach has been driven and flood of knowledge occurs very fast, but by the question on how to treat the resource on the other side the half-life period of knowledge. In between those two we can only knowledge is becoming shorter and shorter. find the discussion how the deployment of The above ideas are especially important valid instruments with which we can handle for service enterprises. Especially the information. management consultancies recognized the Information technology and its applications in importance of their knowledge and developed the management of information resources is very software for storing and retrieving significant role in the development of the nation. knowledge. But also production companies On the one hand information technology is realize the importance of knowledge, and used in almost every enterprise which became sensitizes to that subject.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

The actual researches being done in the field Communication of Information: Information of knowledge management have a lot of that stood the test in one department is not positive resonance. necessarily relevant or applicable in another  A class of languages or other structured department. Mostly everything depends on the means of communication, one part of individual system history and the matching of which is the “target of learning” (material the knowledge to experiences. Communication to be transferred) supposes that the receiver can handle the content  The learning environment that provides and that the information is relevant for him. knowledge material to the learner Especially in that case a question answering  A learning strategy that maps new system like the one developed for this paper has knowledge material onto hypotheses based a big advantage. Only knowledge which is on prior knowledge; and desired and relevant is communicated.  A success criterion that defines Knowledge that will be transported as acceptability and correspondence between knowledge, always includes the fact that the the learner’s conjectures and the learned receiver does not know anything or maybe not material. enough of the actual subject. It is the goal of knowledge management to bring Unfortunately, learners differ considerably in the potential of knowledge which exists in a both backgrounds and cognitive styles. This company into line, so that it builds a integrated diversity requires that the teaching-learning and company-wide knowledge system, which processes must be versatile to take advantage insures a efficient knowledge processing to of the learners’ strengths and compensate for reach the companies aims. Based on that, the their weaknesses. formation of the companies’ whole knowledge INFORMATION MANAGEMENT and the deployment of natural and artificial SYSTEMS & CHALLENGES: resources for the knowledge administration is Challenge of Information: The efforts from necessary. researchers, consultants and managers were Managing Information Flood : When a user made in the field of total quality management, wants to search information in the Internet or lean management, business process Intranet, information about the certain subject management, reengineering or the has to be found and collected. There are implementation of a learning institution. By different possibilities how to find and locate now companies discover knowledge as a information in an IT-System, whereby a challenge, both in an academic and economic combination of different methods can lead to way. This is the step towards a knowledge good performances. If the fully automatic society. Not the production of material goods is preparation is used, a program is following, the central challenge of an enterprise, but the similar like a user, hyperlinks on web-sites or it solution of problems in a fast changing market. scans incrementally in directories on a server. When companies reduce their physical or The documents found in this process are fully material production their creative and automatic. While processing a document or knowledge intensive activity grows. The main webpage the program extracts relevant part of tasks in new companies is now in the information like the name of the author, the field of knowledge work. This work could be title or some keywords. Relevant information described as tasks that are based on can be extracted from documents by using specialized expertise’s of persons, who have an algorithm which prefers frequently used to adopt their profession in lingering training keywords instead of seldom used words. processes. Some documents have certain meta-tags Information as Resource: Besides the which should be considered as well. Another traditional resources like raw materials, work possibility which is very time intensive is and capital, we talk about another resource, to process the whole information of the text as one could guess it is information. This with an a suitable algorithm. If a document can be explained in the following statement. management system is used meta-information “Information can similar like other about the document or explanations can be production factors be analysed, balanced and added by the user. Some systems force the user managed.”. Such a point of view has crucial to input some meta- information. Other consequences to the treatment of information. It information-systems have an automatic search should be one’s aim to dispose this resource and indexing system. Whenever a document is economically and usefully. This could for checked in or out the search index will be instance mean to get it on time and to use updated. This has the advantage that the it without restriction at the location where it is information is always up-to-date. needed. This means the right knowledge at the Problems in Managing Information:It is right time at the right place. To reach that important for the user who works with a statement, one has to make an effort for the knowledgebase, that the search engine offers creation, codification and the storage of the its documents completely and newsworthy. knowledge to manage and control the new While the view is restricted to an intranet resource. here , an IT-system can handle this problem, but the search engines in the world wide web do

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 not aspire this completeness as it would building a information system. A need too much effort. The enormous common desktop, ease of use, technical effort it would need to keep all consistency of representation of the documents up to date cannot be managed content as well as a fast access are basic even by the biggest search engines on the web, conditions which have to be fulfilled, so so that the operator companies try to offer a that a system will be used. partial completeness. When looking at the  Metadata: By means of metadata as structure of links in the www it can be well as rating by experts the quality of concluded that a completeness of all knowledge, stored in documents, can be documents and its links can never be improved evidentially. A special reached, as there is never a central point of entry aspect in a huge and distributed where to begin. company is the use of groups of The same considerations affect the meta data. In doing so the same actuality of already indexed documents information can be allocated to different which contexts have been modified. quality criteria in different departments Without a document-management-system in or areas. To improve the quality of use, the modified documents won’t be information or knowledge it should be recognized. If the collection of meta-tags obligating in every KM- system to add circulates in a certain time period there is a Meta information to a new object. possibility to recognize the change after a  Access Control : An important factor while. If the collection takes days or weeks when distributing knowledge is the there is no chance to find a new article. A access-control, so that sensible data chance of solution is to launch many File can not be seen from all employees or Spiders without fixed intervals and the external clients which are connected to frequently updating of folders or files which the intranet. Another advantage of an changed proportionally often in the past. access control is, that the quality of With that technique the speed of the information data improves when using such a updating can be adapted dynamically. control-system as the quantity of Another problem might be the deleting or information will be reduced and moving of existing documents. The l inks to the documents, which are being used in the search results do not have a valid reference same department show up first. anymore. There are different solutions against  Multilanguage : For a company that this weakness. One is a verification of a domiciled in many countries the reference by the system itself, before offering multilanguage of the knowledge a search result. In the prototype which arises management system and the out of this the sis the question answering information saved in it is important system offers the user to delete so called dead for the quality of information. links manually. Furthermore a user interface Quality and Reliability of Managed language has to be defined and rules Information if documents and information can be The importance of quality and reliability of inserted in different languages. retrieved information rises potentially with the CONCLUSION amount of documents in the internet or intranet. In this paper we have seen information and its The rating of documents can be done in management from many different points of cooperation with the content offerer or by the views. We can distinguish knowledge and user feedback. It is obvious that fully information both in terms of libraries. We can automatic information finding always has a say that knowledge is one abstraction level lack of quality, as the content and the above information and we found out, that information can only be reviewed discipline knowledge can be subdivided in superficially. For instance if a keyword has three different parts, based on informatics, a wrong meaning, it can only be detected by business practice and strategy research. Later on an user. To manage those problems an we tried to see information as a resource. We intelligent information algorithm has to be used. have thoroughly discussed the communication Developers of search engines recognized the fact of information and the problems and and try to implement intelligent algorithms. approaches which can be very useful to manage  Structure of Data: One of the most the information flood. important attitudes of an knowledge or REFERENCES : document management system is the 1. Gary D. Blass et al. "Finding ability to store information in a Government Information: The Federal structured way. By doing so knowledge Information Locator System (FILS)", assets can be categorized easily which Government Information Quarterly, JAI helps again when trying to identify Press, Inc., Greenwich, Connecticut. knowledge. Vol. 8, No. 1, pp. 11-32. 1991.  Usability: A special aspect for the 2. Alavi,M. and Leidner, D., “Knowledge success of knowledge is the Management Systems: Issues, consideration of the usability when Challenges, and Benefits”,

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Communications of the AIS, Vol- 4. Grant, R.M., Toward a knowledge 1,2000. based Theory of the firm., Strategic 3. Borghoff, Uwe M., and Pareschi, R. Management Journal, Vol-17 , 1996, pp- Information Technology for Knowledge 109-122. Management, Springer : Journal of 5. Wiig,E.H. and Karl, M., On Conceptual Universal Computer Science vol. Learning,, Knowledge Research 3,1997, pp- 835-842. Institute, Inc. Working Paper, 1999

POLITICAL EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN IN INDIA

Tejvir Singh Assistant Prof., Dept. of Political Science, DAV College, Sadhaura

ABSTRACT: Today the empowerment of women has become one of the most important concerns of 21st century. But practically women empowerment is still an illusion of reality. In ancient India women hold a high status in the society but due to Social, Political and Economic changes, women lost their status. The study is based on secondary sources. The study reveals that economic and political dimensions play a vital role in political participation and in women empowerment. The true democracy requires not just free and fair elections but also the participation of all in formal and informal political institutions and active participation in decision making process. It will not only improve the status of women but will also strengthen Indian democracy. It will also create infighting spirit against injustice and oppression. The study concludes by an observation that acceptance of unequal gender norms by women are still prevailing in the society. Gender equality, access to education, active participation in decision making and socio economic structure are key factors to empowerment. Otherwise the status of women and their empowerment remained a farfetched dream. Keywords: Political empowerment, Constitution, Women empowerment, Political participation, Socio- economic.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

INTRODUCTION: Government led by Deve Goveda in 1996. Since Women enjoyed a high social status in India then the Amendment Bill had been introduced in during the ancient period. This is evident from the parliament in 1998, 1999, 2002, 2003 and the following lines in the Vedas: “The Gods 2008. The 108th constitutional Amendment Bill have their abode in the house where the women moved in the Rajya Sabha in 2010 was passed are worshiped.” But the aggressions of the by it on March 9, 2010 despite opposition by the Afghans and the Mughals put them under veil Samajwadi Party, Janata Dal (U) and some other and they soon lost that status in the medieval forces. But it is yet to be passed by the Lok period. Attempts were made by Swami Sabha. This leads us to lay the question: Will the Dayanand and the Arya Samaj to recapture that One –third reservation for women in Lok Sabha glory once again. But very little could be and Vidhan Sabha lead to their empowerment? achieved in that direction due to the powerful The answer cannot be affirmative if we keep in hold of the Sanatam Dharma on Hindu society. view the experience of the working of the 73rd Even the western system of education and other and the 74th constitutional Amendment since social reforms could make little difference or 1992. These Amendments have certainly given empowerment in women’s position during the more than One –Third reservation to the women Colonial period. Mahatma Gandhi too did not in the offices of the Panchayati Raj institutions succeed much in his efforts for the mobilization .The urban local bodies however failed to of women in the freedom struggle, though he did empower women in the real sense of the word put the issue of women empowerment on the because it is their husbands or sons who operate centre stage. on the behalf of them. Hence, there is an urgent Women’s full participation in national and local need for the social, cultural, economic and politics is fundamental requirement to psychological empowerment of women before democracy and essential to improve the status of their political empowerment through their women. If a political system neglects women’s capacity building. participation, evades accountability for their Gender equality and women empowerment are rights, it fails half of its citizens. Indeed, true not only a matter of justice but it is a basic democracy is based on the realization of human requirement of democracy. Though, women are rights and gender equality. If one of these taking on a more prominent role in the Indian falters, so do the others. Weak democracy society. Women are entering the public sphere, remains a major barrier to human rights. getting higher education and entering Likewise, the failure to respect human rights is professions earmarked for men. The fact that an impediment to effective democracy. India has several women in leading positions That is why the makers of the Indian looks fairly good in a general perspective of constitution accorded the same status as had women’s influence. There are women in top been given to men in the Fundamental Rights. positions and women leading grassroots Moreover provisions were also made for women organizations. Not to forget is Indira Gandhi, welfare in the Directive Principles of State who was the Prime Minister of India, a woman Policy.(Constitution of India,1950) The attempt and a leader is well known internationally. But, to improve the status of women was accorded a there is a contrasting picture here of illiterate special place in the successive Five Year Plans. women in rural areas who are not being able to However, the situation remained more or less read a newspaper. The diversity in the situation unchanged. This is evident from the report of the of women, and the ongoing changes, make the committee on the status of women (1976). The life of women in India an interesting subject to Committee found that Indian women have only study. Democracy is also about equality, taken representation in the parliament and the irrespective of religion, class or gender. Burns state legislatures. Even in the Panchayti Raj et.(2001) Institutions and the urban local bodies, their Importance of Women’s Political Participation presence was nominal. This happened because Democracy by its very nature requires the full they had neither been given reservation at the and equal participation of men women. national level and the state legislatures nor in the Women’s participation is not a special sub- local bodies of the rural and urban area. theme of democratic governance. It is rather It was in this context that the late Prime Minister inherent in the very idea of democracy itself. It of India, Sh. Rajiv Gandhi moved the 64th is hard to imagine a fully democratic society Amendment bill for giving one third(1/3) without women’s equal participation. The reservation for the women in the Panchayati Raj number of women in leadership positions in Institutions and the 65th Amendment Bill too governments around the world is very low- 12 providing the same in the urban local bodies. Presidents, 12 Prime Ministers, and 8 Speakers This ultimately culminated in the inculcation of of Parliament among the 192 members of the the 73rd and 74th Amendment in 1992 which United Nations. Although women constitute half gave one third (1/3) reservation in Panchayti Raj of the world’s population, they hold only one- Institutions and urban local bodies in 1992. This fifth of seats in parliaments worldwide. The lack gave rise to the demand for reservation for of progress on women’s political participation is women in Lok Sabha and the state legislature the single hardest barrier for women to assemblies and the 81st Amendment Bill was overcome. Women in parliament have played a introduced for this purpose by the Third-Front critical role in the development and enactment of

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 legislation to combat violence against women Princeton. Princeton University press and trafficking in persons. We heard numerous (1960) examples of ways in which women 3. Bayly Susan, (2001), “Caste, Society parliamentarians put gender equality and and Politics in India from the Eighteenth women’s issues on the agenda and focus the Century to the Modern Age”, attention of parliaments on these issues. Kaushik Cambridge University Press; Cambridge Sushila,(1993) 4. Burns ,Nancy,Kay Lahman Educations and Access to Economics Resources Scholzman,and Sidney Women’s economic empowerment is critical to Verba.(2001).The Private Roots of improving women’s lives and also to women’s public action: Gender,Equalitay and ability to contribute to the well-being of their Political families, communities, and countries. Women Participation,Combridge,Harvard can be catalysts for economic growth if they are University Press. given equal opportunities and have access to 5. Constitutions of India (1950) with 73rd economic opportunity. A core strategy for and 74th amendments of (1992). achieving gender equality is education. 6. Kaushik Shushila,(1993) Women’s Education is a necessary building block in Participation in Politics, Vikas,New women’s economic empowerment. Delhi. Milner.(2002) But it is not sufficient. Women 7. Leiserowitz Anothony A., Kates Robert need not only degrees but also marketable skills. W., Parris Thomas M.,(2006), “ They are called for expanding women’s access Sustainability Values , Attitudes, and to credit, markets, products design and Behaviours: A Review of Multinational development, and networks. and Global Trends”. , AR Reviews n Involving Men Leaders in Promoting Gender Advance, August 15, 2006 Equality 8. Milner, H.(2002) Civic Literay : How Gender equality is first and foremost a basic Informed Citizens Make Democracy human right. It is noted, it is also about women Work, Tufts,University Press, and men working together for outcomes that Hanover,N H. benefit societies as a whole. While the 9. Mitra, Subrata Kumar,(1999), “ Effects promotion of gender equality will help women of Institutional Arrangements on overcome barriers that stem from discrimination. Political Stability in South Asia” , It will also enable women to contribute their Annual Review, Political Science , No.2 skills, experiences, and perspectives to solving a 10. Paley Julia, (2002), “Annual Review wide array of public problems. Anthropology, Towards an CONCLUSION: Anthropology of Democracy”, June 26 It is fact that in India, women constitute 11. Robertson David, (2002), “A Dictionary approximately half of the total population. But of Modern Politics” , Europa their involvement in the decision making Publications, Europa publications; process is negligible as they are used as a vote London , third edition. bank. The status of women in Indian context 12. Sekhon Joti, (2006), “Engendering cannot be understood without studying the Grassroots Democracy: Research, gender basis of equality. The economic and Training, and Networking for Women in political dimensions play a vital role in political Local Self-Governance in India “, participation and in women empowerment. We NWSA Journal, Vol. 18, all are familiar that true democracy requires not 13. Stone Linda, (2000), “Kinship and just free and fair elections but also the Gender: An Introduction” , West view participation of all in formal and informal Press; Boulder, Colorado, second political institutions and active participation in edition decision making process. It will not only 14. De Wit Joop.W, (1996), “Poverty, improve the status of women but will also Policy and Politics in Madras Slums: strengthen Indian democracy. It will also create Dynamics of Survival, Gender and infighting spirit against injustice and oppression. Leadership” Thousand Oaks, California At last but not least a supportive social and political democratic environment is required to come forward to play important role to strengthen women empowerment. Otherwise the status of women and their empowerment remained a farfetched dream. REFERENCES: 1. Agar Michael H., (1996), “The Professional Stranger, Academic Press; San Diego, California, second editions 2. Almond, Gabriel and Coleman,James S,The Politics of Developing areas,

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

ROLE OF RURAL BANKS IN RURAL DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA

Praveen Kumar Extension Lecturer in Commerce D. Govt. College, Gurgaon

ABSTRACT The important of the rural banking in the economic development of a country cannot be overlooked. As Gandhi said “real India lies in village” and village economy is the backbone of Indian economy. Without the development of the rural economy, the objective of economic planning cannot be achieved. Hens, banks and other financial institutions are considered to be a vital role for the development of the rural economy in India. Regional Rural Banks (RRBs) were established in October 2, 1975 and are playing a pivotal role in the economic development of the rural India. The main goal of establishing Regional Rural Banks in India is to provide credit to the rural people who are not economically strong enough, especially the small and marginal farmers, artisans, agricultural laborers and even small entrepreneurs. The present study is a modest attempt to make an appraisal of the rural credit structure and the role played by RRBs in the development of rural economy. The objective of this paper is to analyses the rural credit and the role played by the RRBs in the priority and non-priority sector landings.The present research paper is exploratory in nature and makes use of secondary data. The relevant secondary data have been collected mainly through the data bases of reserve Bank of India (RBI), National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD). Introduction The economic development in Indiafollowed socialist-inspired policies for most of its

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 independent history, including state-ownership to the small and marginal farmers, agricultural of many sectors; India's per capita income labourers, artisans and small entrepreneurs. increased at only around 1% annualized rate in Being local level institutions, RRBs together the three decades after Independence. Since the with commercial and co-operative banks, were mid-1980s, India has slowly opened up its assigned a critical role to play in the delivery of markets through economic liberalization. After agriculture and rural credit.2 more fundamental reforms since 1991 and their WHY NEEDS OF RURAL BANKING renewal in the 2000s, India has progressed Indian Rural Development Report 2012-13 towards a free market economy. released in October 2013 by rural development India lives in its villages, and while the cities minister Jairam Ramesh highlights that the have grown immensely over the last 20 years, growth rate of rural per capita consumption rose rural areas have not seen that kind of exponentially in the last seven years. However, development. For India’s economy to be strong, according to the report, rural India still battles the rural economy needs to grow. Rural areas are with poverty and lack of basic infrastructure. still plagued by problems of malnourishment,  30% population of the country lives illiteracy, unemployment and lack of basic Below Poverty Line (BPL) infrastructure like schools, colleges, hospitals,  80% of BPL population lives in rural sanitation, etc. Our villages need to grow in areas tandem with cities and standard of life has to  In 1993-94, nearly 50% of the rural poor improve there for inclusive growth to happen. If lived in seven states – Jharkhand, Bihar, rural India is poor, India is poor. Assam, Odissa, Chattisgarh, MP and UP Rural development is not merely development of  This rose to 65% in 2011-12, though rural areas but also the development of the rural states like Bihar, Chattisgarh and Uttar people into self-reliant and self-sustaining Pradesh have reduced poverty modern little communities. Rural development significantly since2009-10 in the country is designed to enhance the socio-  44% of the rural poor in 2009-10 come economic living conditions for the people living under scheduled castes and scheduled in rural India while conserving their culture and tribe rich tradition. The Government seeks to achieve  18% of rural households have access to higher targets related to rural production, all three basic services – drinking water employment and higher living standards which within premises, sanitation and will pave the way for all round economic electricity development of the country. This includes  45% of rural households lack electricity setting up basic infrastructure and facilities such connections as medical facilities, schools, and transport  70% of rural households lack sanitation facilities, apart from scheme implementation facilities related to improving rural employment,  20% have none of the three basic agricultural productivity and rural services industrialization.1  18% of rural families rely on non-farm The rural population in India suffers from a great employment as major source of their deal of indebtedness and is subject to livelihood exploitation in the credit market due to high  Income from farm livelihood not interest rates and the lack of convenient access sufficient for households to credit. Rural households need credit for  Encourage new crop models, revive investing in agriculture and smoothening out traditional crops like millet seasonal fluctuations in earnings. Since cash  Various types of collective farming help flows and savings in rural areas for the majority small farmers overcome problems of of households are small, rural households scale, insecure land tenancy and poor typically tend to rely on credit for other access to credit, modern supply chains consumption needs like education, food, and storage housing, household functions, etc. Rural Regional Rural Banks (RRBs) were established households need access to financial institutions in the year 1975 as a low cost financial that can provide them with credit at lower rates intermediation structure in the rural areas to and at reasonable terms than the traditional ensure sufficient flow of institutional credit for money-lender and thereby help them avoid debt- agriculture and other rural sectors. RRBs were traps that are common in rural India. expected to have the local feel and familiarity of The Regional Rural Banks have been growing in the cooperative banks with the managerial importance since their inception in 1975 as expertise of the commercial banks.3 special institutions playing a catalyst role in the ROLE OF NABARD development of rural areas. They have been The RRBs Act was enacted in 1976 when playing a significant role in financing the weaker NABARD was not in existence. As a result, in sections of the community in the rural areas and the RRBs Act, there is no mention of NABARD. also in inculcating banking habit among rural Since RRBs deal with rural credit and since masses. Regional Rural Banks were set up with institutions dealing in rural credit are the a view to developing the rural economy by concern of NABARD, the responsibility of providing credit and other facilities, particularly overseeing the overall functioning of RRBs

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 devolves on NABARD. The Government of Rural people in India such as small and marginal India has recently issued instructions to RRBs farmers, landless agricultural laborers, artisans that all matters pertaining their functioning and socially and economically backward castes interpretations relating the circulars earlier and classes, have been exploited in the name of issued by Government of India etc. may be credit facility by informal sectors. The rural referred to NABARD and not to the Government credit market consists of both formal and of India. The newly constituted state level informal financial institutions and agencies that coordination committee (SLCC), has been meet the credit needs of the rural masses in constituted and India. The informal sector advances loans at NABARD has been made the convener instead very high rates of interest; the terms and of the oldest RRB in the state, which was the conditions attached to such loans have given rise practice earlier. The committee would be to an elaborate structure of intimidation of both reviewing the progress made by RRBs in the economic and non-economic conditions in the state so as to suggest remedial measures. rural population of India. The supply of total NABARD has also been made the convener of formal credit is inadequate and rural credit the newly formed forum at the state level in each markets are imperfect and fragmented. state to discuss and thrash out problems relating Moreover, the distribution of formal sector to RRB staff matters. With the convenorship of credit has been unequal, particularly with respect these two committees and the proposed to region and class, cast and gender in the legislation arming NABARD with statutory country side. powers over RRBs, NABARD would be better The history of Regional Rural Banks in India equipped to play its role.4 dates back to the year 1975. It’s the Narasimham ROLE OF RBI committee that conceptualized the foundation of The statutory powers regarding the maintenance Regional Rural Banks in India. The committee of statutory Cash Reserve Ratio (CRR), felt the need of regionally oriented rural banks’ Statutory Liquidity Ratio (SLR), branch that would address the problems and licensing are still vested with the RBI. The requirements of the rural people in India. function regarding the scheduling of RRBs was Regional Rural Banks were established under also watching the obligations under section 42 of the provisions of an Ordinance promulgated on the RBI Act remains with RBI. It is empowered the 26th September 1975 and the RRB Act, 1975 to call for returns from RRBs as laid-down in the with an objective to ensure sufficient Banking Regulation Act. It can give directions to institutional credit for agriculture and other rural the RRBs under the provisions of the B.R. Act, sectors. The RRBs mobilize financial resources on rates of interest to be charged on loans and from rural/semi-urban areas and grant loans and advances, on rates of interest payable on advances mostly to small and marginal farmers, deposits and on regulation of advances. The agricultural laborers and rural artisans. For the RRBs Act, 1976, as it exists today, has also purpose of classification of bank branches, the empowered the RBI in the following matters. Reserve bank of India defines rural area as a  The head office of an RRB is notified by the place with a population of less than central government after consultation with 10,000.RRBs are jointly owned by Government the RBI and the sponsor bank. of India, the concerned State Government and  The authorized and paid-up capital of an Sponsor Banks; the issued capital of a RRB is RRB can be increased or reduced by the shared by the owners in the proportion of 50%, central government in consultation with the 15% and 35% respectively. The objectives of reserve bank, the concerned state RRBs can be summarized as follows: government and the sponsor bank.  To provide cheap and liberal credit facilities  The Central Government is empowered to to small and marginal farmers, agriculture give directions to the RRB is regard to  Laborers, artisans, small entrepreneurs and matters of policy involving public interest in other weaker sections. consultation with the RBI.  To save the rural poor from the  The Central Government may, after moneylenders. consultation with RBI and sponsor bank, by  To act as a catalyst element and thereby notification in the official gazette, make accelerate the economic growth in the rules for carrying out the provisions of the particular region. RRBs Act.  To cultivate the banking habits among the  The Board of Directors of RRB may, after rural people and mobilize savings for the consultation with the sponsor bank and the economic development of rural areas. reserve bank, and with the previous sanction  To increase employment opportunities by of the central government, make regulations encouraging trade and commerce in rural to provide for matters for which provision is areas. necessary or expedient for the purpose of  To encourage entrepreneurship in rural giving effect to the provisions of the RRBs areas. 5 Act.  To cater to the needs of the backward areas REGIONAL RURAL BANKS (RRBS) IN which are not covered by the other efforts of INDIA-AN OVERVIEW the Government?

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

 To develop underdeveloped regions and thereby strive to remove economic disparity between regions.6 CONCLUSION Development of the rural economy is essential in order to ensure a balanced economic growth. The various problems faced by the rural sector such as: illiteracy, lack of access to basic services of electricity, sanitation, drinking water etc. can be overcome if adequate credit facilities are provided. The initiative taken by the RBI to set-up the Regional Rural Banks and other such banks to promote banking in the rural India has come as a boom for these areas. In the present study, the role of RRBs in the rural credits structure has been deeply analysed. The rural credit structure consists of priority sector and the non-priority sector. There has been tremendous achievement in disbursing loans to both the sectors. Though the banks are not left untouched by the challenges, yet an ample amount of opportunity is waiting to be grasped by these banks. REFERENCES 1. Narashimham, M., “Report on Reforms of Financial System”, Sharma, K.C., “Modern Banking in India”, New Delhi: Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2007. 2. Panandikar, S.G., “Banking in India”, Delhi: Orient Longmans, 1976. 3. Lead Bank Scheme, Guidelines, State Bank of India, Chandigarh, 1985Government of India, New Delhi, 1991. 4. Vyas, M.R., “Financial Performance of Rural Banks”, Jaipur: Arihant Publishers, 1991. 5. Vyas, M.R., “Evolution and Management of Regional Rural Banks”, Jaipur: Arihant Publishers, 1990. COTTON CULTIVATION IN HARYANA (SINCE 1966-67)

Inderdeep Singh Extension Lecturer in Geography Dronacharya Govt. College Gurgon Haryana Email: [email protected]

ABSTRACT Haryana has a long history of cotton production and was once a major cotton producing region. In fact, the handloom industry Of Panipat evolved in Haryana, because of cotton is being grown here. Within Haryana, Hisar district is known as the main cotton growing region. However, Haryana has been losing its area under cotton cultivation, thereby losing an opportunity to improve the income potential for farmers in the state. India is today standing as the second largest grower and largest exporter of cotton in the world. In spite of Haryana’s rich history of cotton growing center, the cotton industry would be thriving. This is due mainly to the increasing demand of food grain of the rapidly increasing population, unreliability of rainfall, Unreliable production, its sensitivity to diseases, high production cost and poor agricultural planning and so on. All these factors are responsible for the decreasing area under cotton cultivation. Most of the cotton producing belt is now under food grain cultivation or under other uses. Key Words: Cotton, Handloom, Decrease, Exporter, Producer, Food grain Production, Yield, Diseases, Increase, Study Area: Study area for the present study (shown Figure-1) whole Haryana state. The “Cotton Cultivation In Haryana Since 1966.”is small state Haryana was founded in November

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

1966 when the former state Punjab was divided Figure-1 into Haryana and modern Punjab. Haryana is situated between27° 39´ to 30° 35´north Objectives of the Study: The present study of latitudes and 74° 28´ to 77° 36´ east cotton cultivation in Haryana has followings longitudes. It is located in the northern part of objectives:- India. It is bounded by Uttar Pradesh in east,  To show area under cotton cultivation Punjab in north, Himachal Pradesh in north-east after green revolution in Haryana. and Rajasthan in west and south. Total  To show the change in cotton production geographical area of the study area is 4420000 and yield in Haryana. hectares, which is only 1.4 per cent of the  To show major cotton producing area in geographical area of the country. The altitude of Haryana. Haryana Varies between 200 meters to 1200 The study area experiences semi-arid type of meters above mean sea level. According to climate with average rainfall of 355 mm. Here Forest Report of India (FSI,2013), the forest summer is extremely hot. Temperature during cover in the state is 1586 square kilometers summer occasionally reaches to 50°C,while it which is 3.59 per cent of the state’s geographical down to freezing point in winter. area and the tree cover is 1282 square kilometers In the study-area 3700000 hectares is cultivable, which is 2.90 per cent of the geographical area. which account for 84 per cent of the total The Yamuna-Ghaggar plain in the east and geographical area out of which 3640000 hectares north, the Shivalik Hill in the north-east, semi- i.e 98 per cent is under cultivation. The gross deseart sandy plain to the south-west and the cropped area of the state is 6510000 hectares and Aravali Range in the south are the four major net cropped area is 3640000 hectares with a geographical features of Haryana state. The cropping intensity of 184.91 per Yamuna is the only perennial river flow along cent(Agriculture Ministry Government of India). the eastern boundary of the state. The Ghaggar There are three crop system in Haryana named and Markanda are seasonal rivers of the state rabi, kharif and zaid. Cotton is the main cash originated from the Himalaya, while, Indori, crop the region which is grown in kharif season. Dohan, Kasavati originated from the Aravalis. In year 2011-12 about 601800 hectares area was All these are the tributaries of ancient under cotton cultivation which was fifth in India. SarasvatiRiver which has now disappeared. During this season 2621 thousand bales of 170 kilograms, cotton has been produced with yield of 739 kilograms per hectare. Area under cotton cultivation, its production and yield are shown in the following Table-1

Table-1: Area under Cotton Crop, Cotton Production and Yield of Cotton In Haryana 1966-67 to 2011-12 Years American Desi Total Area Production Yield Area Production Yield Area Production Yield 1966-67 81.0 134 300 102.0 153 289 183.0 288 267 1970-71 88.6 188 359 104.8 185 299 193.4 373 328 1975-76 108.3 214 340 146.7 251 290 255.0 465 310 1980-81 211.6 480 387 104.6 163 264 316.2 643 346 1985-86 262.3 622 402 81.8 123 255 344.1 745 367 1990-91 421.6 1042 421 69.0 113 278 490.6 1155 420 1995-96 490.3 986 342 161.5 298 313 651.8 1284 335 2000-01 394.1 1081 466 161.3 302 319 555.4 1383 424 2005-06 478.3 1267 479 105.5 285 380 583.8 1552 437 2010-11 470.1 1692 612 23.2 55 407 493.3 1747 510 2011-12 583.4 2578 750 18.4 44 416 601.8 2621 739 Area in Thousand Hectares, Production in Thousand Bales of 170 Kg., Yield in Kg /hectare. Source: Statistical Abstract of Haryana 2011-12. In year 1966-67 in Haryana 183 thousand underDesi variety and rest was under American hectares land was under cotton cultivation on cotton cultivation while both these variety had which about 373 thousand bales of the cotton 373 thousand bales of cotton in Haryana. was produced with the yield of 267 kg/hectare. In years 1980-81 total area under cotton In this year production and area under Desi cultivation was 316200 hectares. In this year cotton was more than that of area under first times the area under American cotton was American cotton. In 1970-71 cotton cultivated double than Desi cotton. During this period area was 194 thousand hectares in Haryana out about 643 thousand bales of cotton was of which about 105 thousand hectares area was produced with two yields of 346 kg per hectares.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

In 1985-86area under American cotton was three why the area under this crop started decreasing times than that of area under Desi cotton. Total and this area occupied by rice cultivation in 344 thousand hectares area under cotton Haryana. produced 745 thousand bales of cotton. In year 2000-01 cotton crop expanded over an In year 1990-91 the cotton crop has grown over area of about 555.4 thousand hectares which an area of 490.6 thousand hectares. Out of this produced 1383 thousand bales of cotton with only 69 thousand hectares area was under Desi yield of 424 kg per hectare. In the first decade of cotton and rest 421.6 thousand hectares was twentieth century the area under this crop under its American variety. In this year first time decreased to 493 thousand hectares but the net the yield of cotton crop exceeded for 100 kg per production of cotton increased to 1747 thousand hectare and cotton first time cross the 1000 bales in Haryana. In 2011-12 again there was thousand mark which was 1145 thousand bales great increase in area under cotton crop. In this in early nineties. From the green revolution year total 601.8 thousand hectares area was to1995-96 cotton cultivated area in Haryana under cotton crop plantation. During this season show considerable increase which was 651 2621 thousand bales of 170 kilograms of cotton thousand hectares. This is the highest area under were producedand the yield in the state was 739 cotton cultivation in Haryana so far. After this kg per hectare. Area under cotton cultivation in milestone there is a slow decrease in area under Haryana from 1966-67 to 2011-12 has increased this cash crop. This decrease is due to increasing by 229%. Area under this crop in 2011-12 was demand of land for food grain production and 3.29 times than that area under this crop in 1966- other human use of cultivable land. After 1995- 67. In this duration cotton production has raised 96 economic input in this crop increased rapidly by 9.11 times and we were able to increase our in the form of high yielding variety seeds, yield by 2.77 times in the same time period. fertilizers and pesticides. Consequently, the economic output decreased in cotton crop that is Table-2 District-wise Area under Cotton Cultivation, Cotton Production and Yield in Haryana In 2005-06 District American Desi Total Area Production Yield Area Production Yield Area Production Yield Sirsa 161.5 635 670 29.0 110 644 190.5 745 667

HIsar 114.1 349 521 15.5 47 495 129.6 396 518

Fatehabad 77.1 321 709 13.8 52 632 90.9 373 697

Jind 36.0 109 516 9.8 28 474 45.8 137 506 Bhiwani 39.9 89 378 8.7 14 270 48.6 103 357 Area in Thousand Hectares, Production in Thousand Bales of 170 Kg., Yield in Kg /hectare.Source: Statistical Abstract of Haryana 2011-12. Figure-2 Area under Cotton Cultivation in Haryana 1966-67 to 2011-12

700 600 500 400 Cotton American 300 Cotton Desi 200 Cotton Total 100 0

Area in thousand hectares Source: Statistical Abstract of Haryana 2011-12. The presentstudy also shows district-wise area Table-2 Sirsa district is on the top in cotton under cotton cultivation, production and yield production which has 190.5 thousand hectare s for year 2005-06 and 2011-12. According to area under this crop. Sirsa district has produced

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

745 thousand bales of cotton in year 2005-06 Bhiwani and Jind were other major cotton and yield was 667kg/hectare. Hisar district is on producing districts of the state which combindly 2nd rank with 129.6 thousand hectares area, 396 gave 240 thousand bales of cotton to the total thousand bales production and 518kgs per production of the state. Apart from there five hectare yield. Fatehabad district of the state was major cotton producing district, Mahendergarh, on 3rd position in terms of area under cotton Kaithal, Rohtak, Jhajjer etc. were the two cotton cultivation which has 90.9 thousand hectare area producing area of the state. under this crop. This district was on the top rank in yield with 697kgs per hectare in 2005-06. Figure-3 Cotton Production in Haryana 1966-67 to 2011-12

3000

2500

2000

1500 American Desi Total 1000

500

Production in Thousand Bales of 170 Kilograms Cotton Source: Statistical Abstract of Haryana 2011-12. Table-3 District-wise Area under Cotton Cultivation, Cotton Production and Yield in Haryana In 2011-12 District American Desi Total Area Production Yield Area Production Yield Area Production Yield Sirsa 161.5 635 670 29.0 110 644 190.5 745 667 HIsar 114.1 349 521 15.5 47 495 129.6 396 518 Fatehabad 77.1 321 709 13.8 52 632 90.9 373 697 Jind 36.0 109 516 9.8 28 474 45.8 137 506 Bhiwani 39.9 89 378 8.7 14 270 48.6 103 357 Area in Thousand Hectares, Production in Thousand Bales of 170 Kg., Yield in Kg /hectare. Source: Statistical Abstract of Haryana 2011-12. Figure-4 Yield of Cotton in Haryana 1966-67 to 2011-12

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

800 700 600 500 400 American 300 Desi Total 200 100 0

Yield in Kilogram per Hectare Source: Statistical Abstract of Haryana 2011-12. Table-3 shows the district-wise area under under Desi cotton and rest 421.6 thousand cotton cultivation cotton production and yield in hectares was under its American variety.After Haryana in year 2011-12. This is shown in the 1995-96 economic input in this crop increased Tabel-1 that the area under cotton crops has a rapidly in the form of high yielding variety slight increase of 3 percent in 2011-12 as seeds, fertilizers and pesticides. Consequently, compare to area under this crop in 2005-06 but the economic output decreased in cotton crop production cotton increased by 69 percent during that is why the area under this crop started these 7 years. The production of cotton in 2005- decreasing and this area occupied by rice 06 was 1552 thousand bales which reached the cultivation in Haryana.In year 2000-01 cotton figure of 2621 thousand bales in 2011-12. This crop expanded over an area of about 555.4 development in cotton production in Haryana thousand hectares which produced 1383 was due to increase in yield. The yield of cotton thousand bales of cotton with yield of 424 kg per was 437 kg per hectare in 2005-06 and it hectare. In the first decade of twentieth century touched the mark 739 kg per hectare with a the area under this crop decreased to 493 considerable increase of 46 percent. thousand hectares but the net production of In 2011-12 again Sirsa district with 211.3 cotton increased to 1747 thousand bales in thousand hectare area under cotton crop, 899 Haryana.In 2011-12 again there was great thousand bales cotton production and with 770 increase in area under cotton crop. In this year kg per hectare yield was on the top of the cotton total 601.8 thousand hectares area was under producing districts in Haryana. Hisar was on the cotton crop plantation. During this season 2621 2nd position with 153.5 thousand hectares area, thousand bales of 170 kilograms of cotton were which gave 528 thousand bales of cotton to the produced and the yield in the state was 739 kg national production with 615 kg per hectare of per hectare. Area under cotton cultivation in yield. Fatehabad district was on the 3rd position Haryana from 1966-67 to 2011-12 has increased in area under cotton cultivation with 90.8 by 229%. Area under this crop in 2011-12 was thousand hectares. This district abled to produce 3.29 times than that area under this crop in 1966- 358 thousand bales cotton production with 712 67. In this duration cotton production has raised kg hectare. Fatehabad was on the 2nd position in by 9.11 times and we were able to increase our yield in 2011-12 after Sirsa district. In year yield by 2.77 times in the same time period 2011-12 Jind and Bhiwani district were on the REFERENCES: 4th and 5th position respectively in cotton  Singh, J., & V.K. (1985). Determination production. Kaithal, Mahendergarh, Rohtak, of Agriculture Productivity, A sample Jhajjar, Kurukshetra were the other district study of operational holding for land use which gave their major contribution in cotton planning(pp 183-210). Kurukshetra: producing in Haryana. Vishal Publication. CONCLUSION:  Morgan,W.B., &Munton, R.J.C.(1971). In year 1966-67 in Haryana 183 thousand Agriculture Geography, London, hectares land was under cotton cultivation on Methue and Co. 1971 PP 38-40. which about 373 thousand bales of the cotton  Singh, J., &Dhillon, S.S.(1976). An was produced with the yield of 267 kg/hectare.In Agricultural Geography of Haryana. years 1980-81 total area under cotton cultivation Kurukshetra: Vishal was 316200 hectares. In this year first times the Publication. area under American cotton was double than  Hussain, M.(1960). Pattern of crop Desi cotton.In year 1990-91 the cotton crop has concentration in U.P. Geographical grown over an area of 490.6 thousand hectares. Review of India, Volume 32, no.3. Out of this only 69 thousand hectares area was

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

 Haryana Statistical Abstract, 1990-91,  Lokanathan, P.S.(1967). Cropping 1996-97, 2001-02 and 2011-12. Govt. of Pattern In Madhya Pradesh. National Haryana, Chandigarh. Council of Applied Economic  District Census Handbooks of Haryana Research, New Delhi 18 March 2005-06 and 2011-12.  PP. 6-20.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 ROLE OF SUBHASH CHANDRA BOSE IN INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT

PREETAM NATH M.A, NET/JRF in History

ABSTRACT The contribution of Subhas Chandra Bose is no less. He has been denied his rightful place in the annals of Indian history. Subhash Chandra Bose was one of India‟s greatest freedom fighter. He revived the Indian National Army, popularly known as „Azad Hind Fauj‟ in 1943 which was initially formed in 1942 by Rash Behari Bose. He provided an influential leadership and kept the spirit of nationalism burning during the slack period of national movement in India. In this paper we will studied about role of Netaji in National Movement. Netaji was a patriot to the last drop of his blood. In his passionate love for the motherland, he was prepared to do anything for the sake of liberating his country. Subhash Chandra Bose is a legendary figure in Indian history. His contribution to the freedom struggle made him a brave hero of India. INTRODUCTION Jallianwalla Bagh massacre, and left his Civil Subhas Chandra Bose was born on 23rd Jan, Services apprenticeship midway to return to India 1897 in Cuttack, Orissa, India. His father, Janaki in 1921.But his urge for participating in the Nath Bose had migrated to Cuttack to work as a freedom movement was intense that in April barrister. His mother's name was Probhabati. 1921. Soon, he left home to become an active From his childhood he was a bright student and member of India's independence movement. He, was a topper in the matriculation examination later joined the Indian National Congress, and also from the whole of Kolkata province. Subhash elected as the president of the party. After Chandra Bose was a very intelligent and sincere returning to India Netaji Subhash Chandra Bose student but never had much interest in sports. He came under the influence of Mahatma Gandhi and was admitted to the Protestant European School, joined the Indian National Congress. On like his brothers and sisters, in January 1902. He Gandhiji's instructions, he started working under continued his studies at this school which was run Deshbandhu Chittaranjan Das, whom he later by the Baptist Mission up to 1909 and then shifted acknowledged his political guru. Soon he showed to the Ravenshaw Collegiate School. The day his leadership mettle and gained his way up in the Subhas was admitted to this school, Beni Madhab Congress' hierarchy. In 1928 the Motilal Nehru Das, the headmaster, understood how brilliant and Committee appointed by the Congress declared in scintillating his genius was. After securing the favour of Domination Status, but Subhas Chandra second position in the matriculation examination Bose along with Jawaharlal Nehru opposed it, and in 1913, he got admitted to the Presidency College both asserted that they would be satisfied with where he studied briefly He graduated from the nothing short of complete independence for Scottish Church College in Kolkata with a First India. Class degree in Philosophy. While studying in SUBHASH CHANDRA BOSE WITH Presidency College Calcutta, he organized an CONGRESS attack on the British Principal, Mr F.E. Oaten. As After returning to India Netaji Subhash Chandra a result, he was expelled from the college. The Bose came under the influence of Mahatma principal had made derogatory remarks about the Gandhi and joined the Indian National Congress. Indians in his lecture. This showed Subhash's love On Gandhiji's instructions, he started working for his motherland. Influenced by the teachings of under Deshbandhu Chittaranjan Das, whom he Swami Vivekananda, he was known for his later acknowledged his political guru. During his patriotic zeal as a student. He also adored service with the Indian National Congress, he was Vivekananda as his spiritual Guru. He went to greatly influenced by Bal Gangadhar Tilak and Sri England to fulfil his parents' desire to appear in Aurobindo. He therefore returned to Kolkata to the Indian Civil Services. Bose was placed fourth work under Chittaranjan Das, the Bengali freedom with highest marks in English. However, Subhas fighter and co-founder of the Swaraj Party. He did Chandra Bose was deeply disturbed by the not agree with Gandhiji's methods of achieving

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 Independence through nonviolence. He believed stifle his highflying ambitions. In this manoeuvre that the only way of achieving Independence was of congress many a time he felt suffocated. Once by shedding blood. Subhas Chandra Bose was there was a picture of ‗Subhash Chandra Bose jailed during Civil Disobedience movement in against entire congress party‘. It was first election 1930. He was released in 1931 after Gandhi-Irwin of congress that time. Usually closer aide of pact was signed. He protested against the Gandhi- Mahatma Gandhi used to get elected; but this time Irwin pact and opposed the suspension of Civil Subhash Chandra Bose got elected with higher Disobedience movement specially when Bhagat votes. This insulted Gandhi group, which lead to Singh and his associates were hanged. Subash their less interest of thinking towards parties Chandra Bose was soon arrested again under the campaign for independence. he resigned from infamous Bengal Regulation. After a year he was congress Presidentship and formed his Forward released on medical grounds and was banished Block in 1940 due to differences with Gandhiji. from India to Europe. However both Jawahar and British had held him under house arrest in Subash pushed through the Karachi resolution of Calcutta due to his activities. But in 1941 he 1931, which besides endorsing the Gandhi-Irwin secretly left India. He approached Russia and pact included the principle of fundamental rights Germany for help in India‘s freedom. He and national economic programme. Economic provided leadership to the Indian National Army plannings, land reforms, basic education, and basic after he went to Japan in 1943. civil liberties were to be the frame work of future The Indian National Army (INA): On 4 July congress programme. The Indian Struggle, 1920– 1943, two days after reaching Singapore, Bose 1934 and pleaded India‘s cause with European assumed the leadership of the IIL and the INA in leaders. He returned from Europe in 1936, was a ceremony at Cathay Building. Bose's influence again taken into custody, and was released after a was notable. His appeal re-invigorated the INA, year. In 1938 he was elected president of the which had previously consisted mainly of Indian National Congress and formed a national prisoners of war: it also attracted Indian planning committee, which formulated a policy of expatriates in South Asia. He famously broad industrialization. On 22 June 1939 Bose proclaimed: Give me blood! I will give you organised the All India Forward Bloc a faction freedom : "Local civilians joined the INA, within the Indian National Congress, aimed at doubling its strength. They included barristers, consolidating the political left, but its main traders and plantation workers, as well asSyed strength was in his home state, Bengal. U Manzoor-ul Hasan who were working as shop Muthuramalingam Thevar, who was a staunch keepers; many had no military experience." Carl supporter of Bose from the beginning, joined the Vadivella Belle estimates under Bose's dynamic Forward Bloc. When Bose visited Madurai on 6 appeal, membership of the IIL peaked at 350,000, September, Thevar organised a massive rally as his while almost 100,000 local Indians in South-east reception When Subash Chandra Bose was Asia volunteered to join the INA, with the army heading to Madurai, on an invitation of ultimately reaching a force of 50,000. Hugh Muthuramalinga Thevar to amass support for the Toye— a British Intelligence officer and author of Forward Bloc, he passed through Madras and a 1959 history of the army called The Springing spent three days at Gandhi Peak. Tiger— and American historian Peter Fay (author SUBHASH CHANDRA BOSE VS. of a 1993 history called The Forgotten Army) CONGRESS have reached similar estimates of troop strength. In 1928, during the Guwahati Session of the The first INA is considered to have comprised Congress, a difference in the opinion between the about 40,000 troops, of whom about 4,000 old and new members surfaced. The young withdrew when it was disbanded in December leaders, as against the traditional leadership, 1942. The Second INA started with 12,000 troops. wanted a "complete self-rule and without any Further recruitment of former Indian Army compromise". The senior leaders were in favor of personnel added about 8,000– 10,000. About the "dominion status for India within the British 18,000 Indian civilians also enlisted during this rule". Congress party had undertaken a mission of time. Belle estimates almost 20,000 were local opposing his every thought, insulting him and to Malayan Indians, while another 20,000 were ex-

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 British-Indian Army members who volunteered formed largely after the Imphal offensive had for the INA. The exact organisation of the INA started and drew large remnants of what remained and its precise troop strength is not known, since of the Hindustan Field Force of the First INA. its records were destroyed by the withdrawing The 2nd Division consisted of the 1st Infantry Azad HindGovernment before Rangoon was 95 Regiment, which later merged with the 5th recaptured by Commonwealth forces in 1945. The Guerrilla Regiment to form the INA's 2nd order of battle described by Fay (constructed from Infantry Regiment under Col Prem Sahgal. The discussions with INAveterans), nonetheless, is 1st Infantry Regiment drew a large number of similar to that described of the first INA by Toye civilian volunteers from Burma and Malaya and in The Springing Tiger. The 1st Division, under was equipped with largest share of the heavy M.Z. Kiani, drew a large number of ex-Indian armament that the INA possessed. An additional army prisoners of war who had joined Mohan 3rd Division of the INA was composed chiefly of Singh's first INA. It also drew prisoners of war local volunteers in Malaya and Singapore. This who had not joined in 1942. It consisted of the unit disbanded before Japan surrendered. A motor 2nd Guerrilla Regiment (theGandhi Brigade) transport division was also created, but it was consisting of two battalions under Col. Inayat severely limited by lack of resources. In 1945, at Kiani; the 3rd Guerrilla Regiment (the Azad the end of the INA, it consisted of about 40,000 Brigade) with three battalions under Col. Gulzara soldiers. Unlike Mohan Singh, whose assumption Singh; and the 4th Guerrilla Regiment (or Nehru of the rank of General had generated opposition, Brigade) commanded by the end of the war by Lt. Bose refused to take a rank. Both the soldiers of Col Gurubaksh Singh Dhillon. The 1st Guerrilla the INA and civilians addressed Bose as Netaji Regiment – the Subhas Brigade – under Col. Shah ("Dear leader"). In October 1943, Bose Nawaz Khan was an independent unit, consisting proclaimed the formation of the Arzi Hukumat- of three infantry battalions. A special operations eAzad Hind, or the Provisional Government of group was also to be set up called the Bahadur Free India (also known as Azad Hind or Free group (Valiant), to operate behind enemy lines. A India). The INA was declared to be the army of training school for INA officers, led by Habib ur Azad Hind. Rahman, and the Azad School for the civilian REFERENCE volunteers were set up to provide training to the 1. Marshall J. Getz (2002). Subhas Chandra recruits. A youth wing of the INA, composed of Bose: A Biography. McFarland. pp. 7– 45 young Indians personally chosen by Bose and .ISBN 978-0-7864-1265-5. Retrieved 13 known as the Tokyo Boys, was also sent to Japan's June 2012. Imperial Military Academy, where its members 2. Yasmine Jesudasen. Voices of Freedom trained as fighter pilots. A separate allfemale unit Movement. Sura Books. pp. 57–. ISBN was also created under Lakshmi Sahgal. This unit 978-81-7478-555-8. Retrieved 16 July was intended to have combat commitments. 2012. Named Jhansi ki Rani ("Jhansi Queens") Regiment 3. V. S. Patil (1988). Subhas Chandra Bose, (after the legendary rebel Queen Lakshmibai of his contribution to Indian nationalism. the 1857 rebellion), it drew female civilian Sterling Publishers. Retrieved 16 July volunteers from Malaya and Burma. The 1st 2012. Division was lightly armed. Each battalion was 4. Mercado, Stephen C. (2002). The Shadow composed of five companies of infantry. The Warriors of Nakano: A History of the individual companies were armed with six antitank Imperial Japanese Army's Elite rifles, six Bren guns and six Vickers machine guns. Intelligence School. books.google.com.au Some NCOs carried hand grenades. Men going (illustrated ed.) (Potomac Books, Inc.). p. forward on duty were issued British stocks of 73. ISBN 978- 1-57488-443-2. Retrieved hand grenades by senior officer of the Bahadur 29 November 2013. groups attached to each unit. Mortars were 5. Eric A. Vas (19 May 2008). Subhas available, but Fay points out these were not Chandra Bose: The Man and His Times. available at battalion level. The 2nd Division was Lancer Publishers. pp. 27–. ISBN 978- organised under Colonel Abdul Aziz Tajik It was 81-7062-243-7. Retrieved 16 July 2012.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 6. Hugh Toye (2007). Subhas Chandra Bose. Jaico Publishing House. ISBN 978- 81- 7224-401-9. Retrieved 16 July 2012. International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 96 7. Phani Bhusan Chakraborty; Brajendrakumāra Bhaṭṭācārya (1989). News behind newspapers: a study of the Indian press. Minerva Associates (Publications). ISBN 978-81-85195-16-2. Retrieved 16 July 2012. 8. Eric A. Vas (19 May 2008). Subhas Chandra Bose: The Man and His Times. Lancer Publishers. pp. 32–. ISBN 978- 81-7062-243-7. Retrieved 13 June 20

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

INTELLECTUAL ROOTS OF SOCIAL REFORMERS MOVEMENT IN INDIA

Dr. Sunil Kumar Dept. of History, K.L.P.College, Rewari

ABSTRACT: The uniqueness of the Social Reform Movement in India lay in the inspiration, the ideas and the motivations of the reformers themselves. The impact of this new revivalist nationalism upon the social reform movement is of much significance in that the new nationalists stimulated the reformers belief that all groups in society must benefit from the advances modern India was making. Nationalism and social reform emerge as a result of transformation of traditional societies and the transfer of individual loyalties from the family and caste groups to larger societies of the city, region and nation INTRODUCTION: Indians imbibed the ideas of nationalism and By the 1870's already there had emerged a new liberalism from the Western countries particularly stage in the modern development of Indian from Germany, Italy, Greece, and Belgium. intellectual life. No longer was social protest Besides this, the ideas of Western thinkers namely, confined to individual revolts against established Macaulay, Burke, Bentham, Mill, Spencer, patterns of conduct. With the building up of the Rousseau, and Voltaire also inspired and infra-structure of social mobility — a rapidly encouraged the ideas of independence among the growing system of communication, the expansion Indians. Thus, there was a growth of political of educational facilities and the increase in the consciousness and awakening among the Indians. number and circulation of newspapers — a new There was a rapid spread of English education in set of group loyalties began to sweep over the India especially after the revolt of 1857. The various sections of the educated populace. Thus it second half of the nineteenth century was a was that the first glimmer of national golden age of Liberalism in Europe, particularly consciousness began to appear on the Indian England. The study of the political classics of intellectual horizon. English literature from Milton to Mill planted in Many Hindu reform movements originated in the the minds of English-educated Indians the seeds nineteenth century. These movements led to the of liberalism in its two aspects—nationalism and fresh interpretations of the ancient scriptures of democracy. Upanishads and Vedanta and also emphasised on Thus with the spread of English education, the social reform. The marked feature of these educated Indians gradually became politically movements was that they countered the notion of conscious. The British introduced the English lan- western superiority and white supremacy guage in India with their own selfish interest in propounded by the colonizers as a justification for mind. At the beginning, they mainly needed Indian British colonialism in India. This led to the clerks educated in English in order to strengthen upsurge of patriotic ideas that formed the cultural their rule in India. English education also and an ideological basis for the independence facilitated people of different provinces to come movement in India. Several scholars date the close to one another. Thus, it helped in raising, emergence of nationalism with the founding of national feelings, and political consciousness the Indian National Congress, The early Congress among the Indians. idea of nationalism was elitist and gradualist in Several scholars and religious reformers played conception. Broadly it was based on the theory of their role in furthering the cause of progress of the filtaration of ideas from the top to lower layers of nationalist movement in the country. They society. emphasized the past glory and the rich heritage of In a consideration of the emergence of India India. The study and publication of the ancient nationalism, therefore three important factors Indian literature by the Asiatic Society of Bengal have to be analysed: who were the agents for such and the scholars such as Max Muller, Monier stimulation? What is the character or type of the Williams, Colebrooke, Ranade, Hari Prasad solidarity desired? "And what are the types of Shastri, R.G. Bhandarkar, Rajendra Lai Mittra, symbols manipulated? etc., revealed to the people of India the splendor The British imperialism was the most important of the Sanskrit language and also inculcated factor, which contributed to the rise of among them a feeling of pride in their past and nationalism in India. It made the geographical their faith in the future. unification of the country possible. Before the Religious and social reformers, namely, Raja advent of the British, the people of the south were Rammohan Roy, Keshab Chandra Sen, usually separate from the rest of India except for Debendranath Tagore, Iswar Chandra Vidyasagar, some short intervals. The British imperialism Swami Dayanand Saraswati, Ramakrishna made the people to think as one nation. Paramhamsa, Vivekananda, and others had left a The establishment of British rule in India made tremendous influence on the people of India; and closer relations with the Western world possible. they also were responsible for inspiring the Thus, the contacts with the European countries countrymen to treasure the ideals of freedom and influenced the Indians immensely. The nineteenth liberty. century in Europe was the century of nationalism The establishment of British rule in India made and liberalism. The Indians came to learn their closer relations with the Western world possible. lessons from the Europeans on both these Thus, the contacts with the European countries ideologies. influenced the Indians immensely. The nineteenth

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 century in Europe was the century of nationalism It represented an archaic spiritual essence, a and liberalism. transcendental idea of Universe as well as The Indians came to learn their lessons from the expressing Universal Hinduism and nationhood. Europeans on both these ideologies. Indians Abanindranath Tagore portrayed Bhārat Mātā as a imbibed the ideas of nationalism and liberalism four-armed Hindu goddess wearing saffron- from the Western countries, particularly from colored robes, holding the vedas, sheaves of rice, Germany, Italy, Greece, and Belgium. Besides this, a mala, and a white cloth. The image of the ideas of Western thinkers, namely, Macaulay, Bharatmata was an icon to create nationalist Burke, Bentham, Mill, Spencer, Rousseau, and feeling in Indians during the freedom Voltaire also inspired and encouraged the ideas of struggle. Sister Nivedita, an admirer of the independence among the Indians. Thus, there was painting, opined that the picture was refined and a growth of political consciousness and awakening imaginative, with Bharatmata standing on green among the Indians. earth and blue sky behind her; feet with four There was a rapid spread of English education in lotuses, four arms meaning divine power; white India especially after the revolt of 1857. The halo and sincere eyes; and gifts Shiksha-Diksha- second half of the nineteenth century was a Anna-Bastra of motherland to her children. golden age of Liberalism in Europe, particularly The activities of the reformers of Western India England. The study of the political classics of were their conscious effort to imbue public English literature from Milton to Mill planted in opinion with their rationalism. As against the the minds of English educated Indians the seeds dramatic unconventionality of the Bengali of liberalism in its two aspects—nationalism and Reformers, in Bombay there was no complete democracy. break with traditional society; rather what was Thus with the spread of English education, the sought was a practical adjustment of religious educated Indians gradually became politically convictions and social behaviour toward a more conscious. The British introduced the English lan- open and egalitarian basis. "Totally different was guage in India with their own selfish interest in the impact of Swami Dayanand and the early Arya mind. At the beginning, they mainly needed Indian Samaj on Northern India. Dayanand combined in clerks educated in English in order to strengthen himself several parodoxical dements. Extremely their rule in India. conservative in his thought and beliefs, sometimes English education also facilitated people of to the point of obscurantism, yet astonishingly different provinces to come close to one another. revolutionary in his attitudes and actions, Thus, it helped in raising, national feelings and Dayanand typifies a complex reaction to Western political consciousness among the Indians. The influence, Rejecting the existing caste basis of social and religious reformers asked the people of society, the interior status of women and the India to look to their glorious past and try to bring system of child marriages, he called for a vigorous back the same. They taught people to have faith in programme of social reform aimed not so much at themselves. westernising the Hindu religion as in reviving the The Indian Press and literature both English and glory of the Vedic religion. What Dayanand vernacular also used national conscious among the sought was not to help individuals attain personal people of the country. Newspapers like the salvation by isolating themselves from society; he “Indian Mirror”, “Bombay Samachar” “The was interested in the salvation of society by means Hindu Patriot”, “The Amrit Bazar Patrika”, “The of individual self-assertion and the amelioration of Hindu”, “The Kesari”, “The Bengalee”, etc., social evils. The Brahmo Samaj was started by a tremendously influenced the people of India and Bengali scholar, Ram Mohan Roy in 1828. Ram thus, left an indelible mark on the political life of Mohan Roy endeavoured to create from the the country. The writings of Din Bandhu Mitra, ancient upanashidac texts, a vision of rationalist Hem Chandra Banerjee, Navin Chandra Sen, 'modern' India. Socially, he criticized the ongoing Bankim Chandra Chaterjee, R.C. Dutta and superstitions, and believed in a monotheistic Vedic Rabindra Nath Tagore also affected the minds of religion. His major emphasis was social reform. the people. The “Anand Math” of Bankim He fought against Caste discrimination and Chandra Chaterjee has rightly been regarded as the advocated equal rights for women. Although the “Bible” of modern Bengalee patriotism. Thus, the Brahmos found favourable response from writings of the patriots and scholars brought about the British Government and the Westernized a revolution in the minds of the Indians. It is these Indians, they were largely isolated from the larger revolutionary minds that were responsible for the Hindu society due to their intellectual Vedantic growth of Indian nationalism. and Unitarian views. But their efforts to The image of Bhāratmātā formed with the Indian systematise Hindu spirituality based on rational independence movement of the late 19th century. and logical interpretation of the ancient Indian A play by Kiran Chandra Bannerjee, Bhārat Mātā, texts would be carried forward by other was first performed in 1873. Bankim Chandra movements in Bengal and across India. Arya Chattopadhyay's 1882 Samaj is considered one Hindu renaissance novel Anandamath introduced the hymn "Vandey movements of the late nineteenth century. Arya matram which soon became the song of the Samaj is often considered as a social movement, emerging freedom movement in India. many revolutionaries and political leaders of Bipin Chandra Pal elaborated its meaning in the Indian Independence idealizing and idealist terms, along with Hindu movement likeRamprasadBismil,BhagatSingh ,Shy philosophical traditions and devotional practices.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 amjiKrishnavarma , Bhai Paramanand and Lala political career spanning only four years, he led a Lajpat Rai were to be inspired by it. delegation from Bengal to the Indian National Another 19th century Hindu reformer was Swami Congress session of 1907[14] and contributed to Vivekananda. Vivekananda as a student was the revolutionary newspaper Bande Mataram educated in contemporary Western thought.] He In his famous Uttarpara Speech, he outlined the joined Brahmo Samaj briefly before essence and the goal of India's nationalist meeting Ramakrishna, who was a priest in the movement thus: temple of the goddess Kali in Calcutta and who "I say no longer that nationalism is a creed, a religion, a was to become his guru. Under the influence faith; I say that it is the Sanatan Dharma which for us is of Orientalism, Perennialism and Universalism, nationalism. This Hindu nation was born with the Vivekananda re-interpreted Advaita Vedanta, Sanatan Dharma, with it, it moves and with it, it grows. presenting it as the essence of Hindu spirituality, When the Sanatan Dharma declines, then the nation and the pinnacle indeed of the development of declines, and if the Sanatan Dharma were capable of human's religiosity. This project started with Ram perishing, with the Sanatan Dharma it would perish." Mohan Roy of Brahmo Samaj, who collaborated In the same speech, he also gave a comprehensive with the Unitarian Church, and propagated a strict perspective of Hinduism, which is at variance with monotheism. This reinterpretation produced neo- the geocentric view developed by the later day Vedanta, in which Advaita Vedanta was combined Hindu nationalist ideologues such as Veer with disciplines such as yoga and the concept of Savarkar and DEENDAYAL UPADHYAY: social service to attain perfection from the ascetic "But what is the Hindu religion? What is this religion traditions in what Vivekananda called the which we call Sanatan, eternal? It is the Hindu religion "practical Vedanta". The practical side essentially only because the Hindu nation has kept it, because in this included participation in social reform. Peninsula it grew up in the seclusion of the sea and the He made Hindu spirituality, intellectually available Himalayas, because in this sacred and ancient land it was to the Westernized audience. His famous speech given as a charge to the Aryan race to preserve through the at the Parliament of the World's Religions at ages. Chicago on 11 September 1893, followed huge But it is not circumscribed by the confines of a single reception of his thought in the West and made country, it does not belong peculiarly and for ever to a him a celebrity in the West and subsequently in bounded part of the world. That which we call the Hindu India too. His influence can still be discerned in religion is really the eternal religion, because it is the popular western spirituality, such universal religion which embraces all others. If a religion is as nondualism, New Ageand the veneration not universal, it cannot be eternal. A narrow religion, a of Ramana Maharshi. sectarian religion, an exclusive religion can live only for a A major element of Vivekananda's message was limited time and a limited purpose. This is the one religion nationalist. He saw his effort very much in terms that can triumph over materialism by including and of a revitalisation of the Hindu nation, which anticipating the discoveries of science and the speculations of carried Hindu spirituality and which could counter philosophy." Western materialism. The notions of White In 1910, he withdrew from political life and spent supremacy and Western superiority, strongly his remaining life doing spiritual exercises and believed by the colonizers, were to be questioned writing. But his works kept inspiring based on Hindu spirituality. This kind of spiritual revolutionaries and struggles for independence, Hinduism was later carried forward by Mahatma including the famous Chittagong Uprising.] Both Gandhi and Sarvepalli Radhakrishnan. It also Swami Vivekananda and Sri Aurobindo are became a main inspiration for the current brand of credited with having founded the basis for a vision Hindu nationalism today.One of the most revered of freedom and glory for India in the spiritual leaders of the Rashtriya Swayamsevak richness and heritage of Hinduism. Sangh (RSS), Babasaheb Apte’s lifelong pet Independence movement sentence was "Vivekananda is like Gita for the The influence of the Hindu renaissance RSS." Historians have observed that this helped movements was such that by the turn of the 20th the nascent Independence movement with a century, there was a confluence of ideas of the distinct national identity and kept it from being Hindu cultural nationalism with the ideas the simple derivative function of European of Indian nationalism. Both could be spoken nationalisms. synonymous even by tendencies that were Sri Aurbindo was a nationalist and one of the first seemingly opposed to sectarian communalism and to embrace the idea of complete political Hindu majoritism. The Hindu renaissance independence for India. He was inspired by the movements held considerable influence over the writings of Swami Vivekananda and the novels revolutionary movements against the British rule of Bankim Chandra Chattopadhyay.He “based his and formed the philosophical basis for the claim for freedom for India on the inherent right struggles and political movements that originated to freedom, not on any charge of misgovernment in the first decade of the twentieth century. or oppression”. He believed that the primary Revolutionary movements requisite for national progress, national reform, is ANUSHILAN SAMITI AND JUGANTAR the free habit of free and healthy national thought Anushilan Samiti was one of the prominent and action and that it was impossible in a state of revolutionary movements in India in the early part servitude. He was part of the revolutionary of twentieth century. It was started as a cultural groupAnushilan Samiti and was involved in society in 1902, by Aurobindo and the followers armed struggle against the British[15] In his brief of Bankim Chandra to propagate the teachings of

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 the Bhagavad Gita. But soon the Samiti had its that were later formulated by Savarkar in his book goal to overthrow the British rule in named 'Hindutva'. Hindutva was to gain relevance India. Various branches of the Samiti sprung in the run up to the Indian Independence and across India in the guise of suburban fitness clubs would also form the core to the political party but secretly imparted arms training to its members named Hindu Mahasabha started by Savarkar. with the implicit aim of using them against the “Lal-Bal-Pal” is the phrase that is used to refer to British administration. the three nationalist leaders Lala Lajpat Rai, Bal On 30 April 1908 at Muzaffarpur, two Gangadhar Tilak and Bipin Chandra Pal who held revolutionaries, Khudiram Bose and Prafulla the sway over the Indian Nationalist movement Chaki threw bombs at a British convoy aimed at and the independence struggle in the early parts of British officer Kingsford. Both were arrested twentieth century. trying to flee. Aurobindo was also arrested on 2 Lala Lajpat Rai belonged to the northern province May 1908 and sent to Alipore Jail. The report sent of Punjab. He was influenced greatly by the Arya from Andrew Fraser, the then Lt Governor of Samaj and was part of the Hindu reform Bengal to Lord Minto in England declared that movement. He joined the Indian National although Sri Aurobindo came to Calcutta in 1906 Congress in 1888 and became a prominent figure as a Professor at the National College, “he has in the Indian Independence Movement.] He ever since been the principal advisor of the started numerous educational institutions. The revolutionary party. It is of utmost importance to National College at Lahore started by him became arrest his potential for mischief, for he is the the centre for revolutionary ideas and was the prime mover and can easily set tools, one to college where revolutionaries like Bhagat replace another.” But charges against Aurobindo Singh studied. While leading a procession against were never proved and he was acquitted. Many the Simon Commission, he was fatally injured in members of the group faced charges and were the lathi charge by the British police. His death led transported and imprisoned for life. Others went the revolutionaries like Chandrashekar Azad and into hiding. Bhagat Singh to kill the British officer J. P. In 1910, when, Aurobindo withdrew from political Saunders, who they believed was responsible for life and decided to live a life of the death of Lala Lajpat Rai. renounciate, the Anushilan Samiti declined. One Bal Gangadhar Tilak was a nationalist leader from of the revolutionaries, Jatindra Das Mukherjee, the Central Indian province of Maharashtra. He who managed to escape the trial started a group has been widely acclaimed the "Father of Indian which would be called Jugantar. Jugantar unrest" who used the press and Hindu occasions continued with its armed struggle with the British, like Ganesh Chaturthi and symbols like the Cow but the arrests of its key members and subsequent to create unrest against the British administration trials weakened its influence. Many of its members in India.] Tilak joined the Indian National were imprisoned for life in the notorious Congress in 1890. Under the influence of such Andaman Cellular jail. leaders, the political discourse of the Congress India House moved from polite accusation that imperial rule A revolutionary movement was started by Shyamji was “un-British” to the forthright claim of Tilak Krishnavarma, a Sanskritist and an Arya Samajist, that “Swaraj is my birthright and I will have it”. in London, under the name of India House in Bipin Chandra Pal of Bengal was another 1905. The brain behind this movement was said to prominent figure of the Indian nationalist be V D Savarkar. Krishnaverma also published a movement, who is considered a modern Hindu monthly "Indian Sociologist", where the idea of an reformer, who stood for Hindu cultural armed struggle against the British was openly nationalism and was opposed to sectarian espoused. The movement had become well known communalism and Hindu majoritism. He joined for its activities in the Indian expatriates in the Indian National Congress in 1886 and London. When Gandhi visited London in 1909, wThough Mahatma Gandhi never called himself a he shared a platform with the revolutionaries "Hindu nationalist"; he believed in and propagated where both the parties politely agreed to disagree, concepts like Dharma and "Rama Rajya” (Rule on the question of violent struggle against British of Lord Rama) as part of his social and political and whether Ramayana justified such violence. philosophy. Gandhi said “By political Gandhi, while admiring the "patriotism" of the independence I do not mean an imitation to the young revolutionaries, had dissented vociferously British House of commons, or the soviet rule of from their violent blueprints for social change. In Russia or the Fascist rule of Italy or the Nazi rule turn the revolutionaries disliked his adherence to of Germany. They have systems suited to their constitutionalism and his close contacts with genius. We must have ours suited to ours. What moderate leaders of Indian National Congress. that can be is more than I can tell. I have Moreover, they considered his method of "passive described it as Ramarajya i.e., sovereignty of the resistance" effeminate and humiliating. people based on pure moral authority." He The India House had soon to face a closure emphasised that "Rama Rajya" to him meant following the assassination of William Hutt peace and justice. “Whether Rama of my Curzon Wyllie by the revolutionary Madan Lal imagination ever lived or not on this earth, the Dhingra, who was close to India House. Veer ancient ideal of Ramarajya is undoubtedly one of Savarkar also faced charges and was true democracy in which the meanest citizen could transported. Shyamji Krishna Varma fled to be sure of swift justice without an elaborate and Paris. India House gave formative support to ideas costly procedure.” He also emphasised that it

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 meant respect for all religions: “My Hinduism party, and did not play central role many of teaches me to respect all religions. In this lies the the Indian independence movement. However, secret of Ramarajya.” the RSS emphatically rejected the Congress policy Madan Mohan Malviya, an educationist and a of cooperation with the Muslims. Subsequently, in politician with the Indian National Congress was 1934, the Congress banned its members from also a vociferous proponent of the philosophy joining RSS, Hindu Mahasabha or Muslim of Bhagavad Gita. He was the president of the League. He died in 1940. Indian National Congress in the year 1909 and After M. S. Golwalkar became head of RSS in 1918. He was seen as a 'moderate' in the Congress 1940. RSS didn't take part in many anti-British and was also considered very close to Gandhi. He activities, as Golwalkar did not want to give the popularized the Sanskrit phrase "Satyameva British any excuse to ban the RSS. After the Jayate" (Truth alone triumphs), which today is the Muslim League passed the Lahore national motto of the Republic of India. He Resolution demanding a separate Pakistan, the founded the Benaras Hindu University in 1919 RSS campaigned for a Hindu nation, but stayed and became its first Vice-Chancellor. away from the independence struggle. When the Apart from Gandhi, revolutionary leader British Government banned military drills and use Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose referred to Vedanta of uniforms in non-official organizations, and the Bhagavad Gita as sources of inspiration for Golwalkar terminated the RSS military the struggle against the British. Swami department.A number of RSS members had Vivekananda's teachings on universalism, his joined the Quit India Movement but not the naval nationalist thoughts and his emphasis on social revolt. service and reform had all inspired Subhas CONCLUSION Chandra Bose from his very young days. The fresh The impact of this new revivalist nationalism upon interpretation of the India's ancient scriptures the social reform movement is of much appealed immensely to Subhas.] Hindu spirituality significance in that the new nationalists stimulated formed the essential part of his political and social the reformers belief that all groups in society must thought through his adult life, although there was benefit from the advances modern India was no sense of bigotry or orthodoxy in it. Subhas making. The assertion that Social Reform and who called himself a socialist, believed that nationalism are irrevocably linked as living socialism in India owed its origins to Swami processes and as organized movements in India as Vivekananda. As historian Leonard Gordan well as elsewhere. Nationalism and social reform explains "Inner religious explorations continued to emerge as a result of transformation of traditional be a part of his adult life. This set him apart from societies and the transfer of individual loyalties the slowly growing number of atheistic socialists from the family and caste groups to larger and communists who dotted the Indian societies of the city, region and nation. landscape." "Hinduism was an essential part of his REFERENCES: Indianess". His strategy against the British also 1. Jain, Girilal (1994). The Hindu Phenomenon. included the use of Hindu symbols and festivals. New Delhi: UBS Publishers' In 1925, while in Mandalay jail, he went on a Distributors.ISBN 81-86112-32-4. hunger strike when Durga puja was not supported 2. Peter van der Veer, Hartmut Lehmann, by prison authorities. Nation and religion: perspectives on Europe Another leader of prime importance in the ascent and Asia, Princeton University Press, 1999 of Hindu nationalism was Dr Keshav Baliram 3. c Li Narangoa, R. B. Cribb Imperial Japan and Hedgewar of Nagpur. Hedgewar as a medical National Identities in Asia, 1895–1945, student in Calcutta had been part of the Published by Routledge, 2003 revolutionary activities of the Hindu Mahasabha, 4. Bhatt, Chetan, Hindu Nationalism: Origins, Anushilan Samiti and Jugantar. He was charged Ideologies and Modern Myths, Berg with sedition in 1921 by the British Publishers (2001), ISBN 978-1-85973-348-6 Administration and served a year in prison. He 5. Mahajan, Vidya Dhar and Savitri Mahajan was briefly a member of Indian National (1971). Constitutional history of India, [36] Congress. In 1925, he left the Congress to form including the nationalist movement (6th the Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh with the help of edition). Delhi: S. Chand. Hindu Mahasabha Leader Dr. B. S. Moonje, 6. Glory Of Indian Culture, p.40, Giriraj Shah Bapuji Soni, Gatate Ji etc., which would become Satya Pal Ruhela - 2003 the focal point of Hindu movements in 7. Thomas R. Metcalf, A Concise History of Independent India. After the formation of the India, Cambridge University Press, 2002 RSS too, Hedgewar was to take part in the Indian Bhagat Singh, Why I am an atheist, Selected National Congress led movements against the 8. Writings of Shaheed Bhagat Singh by Bhagat British rule.] He joined the Jungle Satyagraha Singh, Shiv Verma, National Book Centre, agitation in 1931 and served a second term in 1986 prison. The Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh started by him became one of the most prominent Hindu organisation with its influence ranging in the social and political spheres of India. The RSS portrayed itself as a social movement rather than a political NON-GOVERNMENT ORGANISATIONS IN THE CONTEXT OF INDIA

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Joginder Singh 257/12 Hans Enclave, Jaipur Bye-Pass Road Gurgaon NGO have a long history in India. In the past, important characteristic of poverty can be people in this country have been found to have eliminated. Moreover, a substantial number of provided help to others in trouble. Since centuries NGOs are involved with one of the most there exists the tradition of voluntary service to important problems facing the poor: Lack of the needy and helpless in the country. In the quality skills and employment opportunities. beginning, these services were rendered by people These NGOs focus on skill development and motivated by their religious feelings. Gandhiji was livelihood creation by creating entrepreneurial immensely concerned with the problems and evils opportunities for them the people were beset with. He, along with his war ROLE OF NON-GOVERNMENT against the British rule, wanted to eliminate the ORGANISATIONS IN INDIAN SOCIETY: social evils and awaken the people of India to Floods, fires, earthquakes, epidemic outbreaks and come out of the closed shell of the evil traditions other kinds of calamities were the occasions which like untouchability, caste segregation, and motivated people to voluntary help those who subservience to the landholding castes and general were trapped in disastrous situations. It is around backwardness. In order to achieve these goals, the late 18th and early 19th century that several VOs were formed under the influence of associations and organizations were being formed the ideals of Gandhiji. A few of them are Sewa, to render such activities in a more organized and Eklavya, Disha etc., which were instituted in permanent profile. There are various areas in Gujarat and some others might have been formed which NGOs played active and appreciative role in other states also. such as:- In India, it was the 1970s which saw rapid growth PROVIDE EDUCATION TO UNDER in the formation of formally registered NGOs and PRIVILEGED PEOPLE: the process continues to this day. Most NGOs education, particularly among that section of have created their respective thematic, social population, which has remained un-benefited or group and geographical priorities such as poverty less benefited by the measures adopted by the alleviation, community health, education, housing, government. The education of girls, and other human rights, child rights, women’s rights, natural deprived people, particularly the SCs and STs, has resource management, water and sanitation. been their target objective. NGOs are voluntary organization s (VOs). These DEVELOPMENT AND OPERATION OF are popularly known as NGOs because they are INFRASTRUCTURE: free from governmental control in their Community-based organizations and cooperatives functioning. They are democratic and open to all can acquire, subdivide and develop land, construct those wishing to become member of the housing, provide infrastructure and operate and organization voluntarily and serve the society. maintain infrastructure such as wells or public They believed that service to people would be the toilets and solid waste collection services. They service to God. Voluntary organizations, working can also develop building material supply centres at both national and international levels, have and other community-based economic enterprises. earned praise for their services in societal In many cases, they will need technical assistance development. These organizations are busy in or advice from governmental agencies or higher- creating awareness and zeal for participation in level NGOs. development projects. EFFORTS TOWARDS REDUCTION OF Ensuring humanism by fighting against human GENDER DISCRIMINATION: rights violations, social exclusions, domestic NGOs play very important role in reduction of violence and others have been common objectives evil of gender discrimination. Women are the of the NGOs. Of late, these organizations are also other vulnerable section of society. Gender entering the sector of economic well-being and discrimination is a ubiquitous cultural reality. Girls standard of living. In the state of Uttar Pradesh, are discriminated in the upbringing pattern in the Agrani Foundation’s Jan Suraksha Kranti (JSK) family. Larger numbers of the undernourished are scheme of savings and life insurance is indeed a from amongst the girls. Retention of girls in commendable effort in this direction. schools is much less as compared to boys. Women In India, there are NGOs doing brilliant work in are forced to work as housewife and denied different fields. In the education sector for participation in gainful economic activities outside example, some of the most prominent NGOs homes. About three-fourths of the work done by would include Pratham (research on educational women is un-monetized. outcomes, famous for the Annual State of SUPPORTING INNOVATION, Education Report), Teach for India (direct DEMONSTRATION AND PILOT intervention in low income classrooms) and PROJECTS: Akshya-Patra (involved with the mid-day meal NGO have the advantage of selecting particular scheme). Others such as Goonj are involved with places for innovative projects and specify in other problems having the poor. Goonj specially advance the length of time which they will be focuses on clothing and believes that merely by supporting the project - overcoming some of the reusing the existing clothing in the nation; one shortcomings that governments face in this

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 respect. NGOs can also be pilots for larger COMMENDABLE JOB FOR HOMELESS government projects by virtue of their ability to PEOPLE: act more quickly than the government The NGOs have a major role to play towards the bureaucracy. cause of people’s resettlement and are also CHANGE IN THE STATUS OF WOMEN: performing commendable job in this direction. It Because of active participation of NGOs towards is not that the development process has unleashed upliftment of status of women shows significant only environmental threats to the human existence change in the status of women with their active but also many people are displaced due to participation in political, social and economic developmental projects and are quite often not activities, which gained acceleration since the last properly compensated and rehabilitated. The quarter of the preceding century. More and more projects like the construction of dams, road women started moving out of the four walls of highways and railways have often made some their houses and involving themselves actively in sections of people, particularly in rural areas, the social sphere outside their homes. vulnerable and are displaced without being Important in this process has been the role of properly compensated. academicians and NGOs. The book Women’s ADVOCACY FOR AND WITH THE POOR: Role in Economic Development by Easter In some cases, NGOs become spokespersons or Boserup (1970) is the pioneering work in this ombudsmen for the poor and attempt to influence direction. The role of women voluntary government policies and programmes on their organizations towards this cause has been behalf. This may be done through a variety of marvellous. Sewa, Sathin, Eklavya, Disha, means ranging from demonstration and pilot Environmental Action Group and Agrani projects to participation in public forums and the Foundation etc. are some of the thousands of formulation of government policy and plans, to NGOs known for their role in development by publicizing research results and case studies of the creating awareness among people. poor. Thus NGOs play roles from advocates for FACILITATING COMMUNICATION: the poor to implementers of government NGOs can facilitate communication upward from programmes; from agitators and critics to partners people to the government and downward from and advisors; from sponsors of pilot projects to the government to the people. Communication mediators. upward involves informing government about RESTORING DIGNITY OF DEPRIVED what local people are thinking, doing and feeling AND DISCRIMINATED SECTIONS OF while communication downward involves THE SOCIETY: informing local people about what the NGOs are also rendering great service in restoring government is planning and doing. NGOs are also dignity to the deprived and discriminated sections in a unique position to share information of the people in the society like women suffering horizontally, networking between other from gender discrimination, lower caste people organizations doing similar work. suffering from caste segregation and the status of CREATING AWARENESS AGAINST untouchable, racial and religious discriminations. ENVIRONMENTAL DEGRADATION Voluntary organizations, working at both national AND DEPLETION OF RESOURCES: and international levels, have earned praise for The approach to development has been almost their services in societal development. These uniform world over at least in terms of the use of organizations are busy in creating awareness and technology, magnitude of production, pattern of zeal for participation in development projects. consumption and achievement of wealth. Both Ensuring humanism by fighting against human state and people were unaware or lackadaisical rights violations, social exclusions, domestic about the backwash of the nature of development violence and others have been common objectives pursued. The threat to the human life developed of the NGOs. Of late, these organizations are also due to environmental pollution and imbalance and entering the sector of economic well-being and the depletion of natural resources as a standard of living. In the state of Uttar Pradesh, consequence of the nature of development. Here, Agrani Foundation’s Jan Suraksha Kranti (JSK) the role of NGOs is really noticeable and scheme of savings and life insurance is indeed a praiseworthy. Thousands of voluntary commendable effort in this direction. organizations are at work to awaken people and CONCLUSION: governments against environmental degradation As modernizing economies increasingly shift to and depletion of resources. free markets and private enterprise, they often DEVELOPMENT AND OPERATION OF experience a decline in social cohesion and an INFRASTRUCTURE: increase in economic and social inequity. In these Community-based organizations and cooperatives circumstances the nongovernmental sector has can acquire, subdivide and develop land, construct proven to be an essential mitigating force that housing, provide infrastructure and operate and helps create a healthier balance between the maintain infrastructure such as wells or public potential excesses of capitalism and the toilets and solid waste collection services. They inefficiencies and limited resources of the state. can also develop building material supply centres This has certainly been the case in my own and other community-based economic enterprises. country. NGOs enable citizens to work together In many cases, they will need technical assistance voluntarily to promote social values and civic or advice from governmental agencies or higher- goals which are important to them. They promote level NGOs. local initiative and problem-solving. Through their

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 work in a broad array of fields – environment, health, poverty alleviation, and culture & the arts, education, etc. – NGOs reflect the diversity of society itself. They are established and sustained by individuals working collectively in their communities. By empowering citizens and promoting change at the “grass roots. NGOs (Non-governmental organizations) are increasingly becoming an important force, because they are innovative, flexible, independent, and responsive to the problems of poor people at the grass-roots level. Despite this NGOs are facing various problems in achieving their objectives. One of the major problems that NGOs are facing in India is their dependency upon government funds or external donations. With this dependency, NGOs are less flexible in carrying out their task as most of the tasks depend upon funds. Moreover, the structures of NGOs have become bureaucratic in nature leading to a decreased effectiveness in the overall development. Apart from these, there are certain problems like underprivileged rural industries, social and cultural differences, conflicts between different groups, administrative problems like political interference, lack of motivation and interest act as hurdles on the way to rural development in India. But in spite of all the hurdles, NGOs will keep on working for rural development in India. NGOs selectively utilized the local talent, train the individuals and use this for rural development. In the long term, NGOs will continue to play a larger role in nation-building. Increasing prosperity and increased focus on Corporate Social Responsibility spending will definitely help in increasing the focus on the disadvantaged sections of society. Those NGOs that are able to adopt best practices and bring about the maximum transparency through auditing and reporting will be best placed to receive a larger chunk of funds in the coming years. NGOs such as Akshya-Patra have grown enormously in scale by consistently delivering results year after year. CSR spending will benefit only the most credible organisations and allow them to grow in scale. This is a good trend, larger and more accountable NGOs will be able to deliver more effectively and efficiently, making best use of resources. Thus, NGOs will continue to play a larger role in Indian society, but it is also essential for NGOs to open themselves for auditing and reporting. REFERENCES: www.socialjustice.nic.in www.ministryofruraldevelopment.gov.in www.planningcommission.nic.in

SUSTENANCE OF AROMATIC POLYSULFONES DURING ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION

Deepika

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

Visiting Faculty, Dept. of Chemistry Pt. J.L.N. Govt. College, Faridabad The present paper describes the UV deterioration instances to detect small but highly significant and sustenance of aromatic polysulfones which changes within the polymer system. can be processed as bonafied thermoplastics by Without some change in property, the chemist conventional molding and solution casting often has no point of reference from which to techniques. The aromatic polysulfones (APS) were compare the stability of one polymer to another. introduced as molding powder where they provide Rather, retention of strength properties, failure to exceptionally good physical and electrical discolor, maintenance of flexibility, failure to properties at 1500 C. The oxidative stability at embrittle or maintenance of insulating 1500 C temperature is exceptionally good, characteristics may define stability to a particular although resistance to weathering and ultra-violet chemist. A far more idealistic definition of stability radiations is beyond satisfaction. It is, therefore, should be: the resistance of a polymer to physical the attempts have been made to photo stabilize and chemical change. In practice this definition the aromatic polysulfones (APS) at the has been used for many years in defining the temperature of 3730K . stability of low-molecular-weight organic and The morphological and chemical changes inorganic materials, but it somehow has been lost accompanying the exposure of aromatic in a maze of superfluous detail when extrapolated polysulfones to elevated temperature in both inert to polymers. Undoubtedly, this definition is quite and oxidizing atmosphere, undoubtedly have sound from a fundamental viewpoint. However, it received the great attention as opposed to other fails to be acceptable when applied to the majority energy transfer processes, such as the exposure to of polymers. The basic reason for this failure lies light (infrared, visible and ultraviolet), radiations in the fact that polymer chemists, in general, have and mechanical deformation. studied the details of polymerization in great Considering the potential applications of depth, but rarely have the reaction products been polysulfones, particularly those of the aromatic characterized in sufficient detail to give the types, as substitutes for metals and naturally aforementioned definition any real meaning. occurring structural materials, the trend toward Changes in stability may be due to a number of the evaluation of the stability of the polymeric complex, interrelated phenomena ranging from materials over a wide range of use conditions, the structure of the substance itself (considered as needs no detailed justification. New stabilizers the monomeric or repeating unit) to changes in development to improve the range of service of crystallinity of the bulk phase. It must be polymeric materials likewise is a natural step in the recognized that minor changes in morphology, not extension of the applicability of man-made directly traceable to physical or chemical changes substances to practical materials needs. With the occurring within the polymer, can have a need for materials which can function both at profound effect upon the ability of the polymer to room temperature as well as very high undergo chemical changes. Considering such temperatures for extended periods of time without possibilities from the broadest possible view, the significant loss in mechanical properties; in effect of molecular weight, the distribution of environments not necessarily similar to those molecular weight, the polymer structure, the found on this planet; and under conditions such stereochemistry of the polymer unit, and the inter that, after extended periods of time, significant chain relationships, such as crystallinity in some volatile materials from deterioration processes are regions as contrasted to others, all will eventually not evolved from the polymer to contaminate have an effect upon the stability of the polymer. confined atmosphere, the materials requirements In any isolation of the more important factors of which the chemist must remain cognizant with responsible for polymer deterioration under a respect to the type and composition of polymer given set of conditions, the impression should not systems have become quite rigid. be formed that polymer degradation is simple or Unfortunately, in most instances, the chemist in clear-cut. For example, if a polymer system speaking of the stability of a particular polymer (plasticized and pigmented) is subjected to air simply means the serviceability of the material exposure in an outdoor environment, processes with respect to one or more physical properties such as oxidation, photolysis, mechanical stresses which are of concern to him. Again unfortunately, from expansion and contraction due to variations the property may not be due, specifically, to the in temperature, thermal degradation, plasticizer, polymer itself the service environment. Indeed, volatilization, photosensitization, crystallization, changes in a substance such as a polymer can and potential catalysis of numerous occur without being observed by the chemist decomposition reactions by the pigmenting using even the most sophisticated instrumental substances can be envisioned as just a few of the techniques. The polymer may change without loss possible phenomena responsible for deterioration of weight, without being observed by the chemist of the sample. Determining the contribution of using even the most sophisticated instrumental each of these phenomena from a qualitative point techniques. The polymer may change without loss of view, no less quantitatively, represents a very of weight, without changes in the spectral formidable task. Because of this fundamental behaviour of the substance or in the electrical and complexity, coupled with the difficulties of mechanical properties, and without an observed relating chemical changes to property changes as change in heat content. Quite clearly, our present noted earlier, the study of polymer deterioration tools are not sufficiently sensitive in many has progressed very slowly.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

To further simplify the problem of gaining cyclic monomers are capable of depolymerization. comparative stability data, an enormous body of For this route to be typical, it is clearly recognized literature has been compiled from "off-the-shelf" that the breakoff of a monomer unit must polymers and routine thermal analysis data on produce an initial radical of high stability materials of unknown structure. Many of these contrasted to other possible fragmentation materials contain numerous spurious functional processes, such as elimination or bond rupture. groups and/or unknown or undisclosed additives Considering a roughly random scission of the in the form of contaminating metals, inorganic chains, again in a very simple system, quite a fillers, stabilizers, plasticizers, etc. In addition, an different relationship between strength and unknown past history, particularly regarding the molecular weight well be expected. For each method of processing and prior photo exposure to scission, a new, lower molecular weight polymer degrading environments, often makes a reasonable fragments would be formed. Indeed, statistics evaluation of reported work difficult. This should predict that very small numbers of these not be construed as a criticism of such reports. It fragments would be volatilized under most is clear that the recognition of such complications conditions without further extensive chain and the continuous improvements in pinpointing rupture. Such random scissions generally lead to a such difficulties are a reflection of an active field complex degradation pathway, cross-linking, loss of study. Often, however, the reviewer or of small fragments from secondary reactions, investigator cannot separate fact from fiction changes in repeat unit functionality, and other concerning the correct route for a particular complex chemical changes. In some cases, the polymer degradation due to conflicting literature mechanical strength of the polymer may well reports. exhibit improvement rather than the expected It is also clear that if the actual chemistry of the diminution. As already noted, the cross-linking degradation reaction is sought, then a detailed process may have long range effects upon the knowledge of the polymer structure is necessary. molecular weight. It can be rationalized that, Such information is often unavailable and, in fact, considering the bond strengths along, the polymer may be best evaluated from the study of the chain as stronger than those between chains, the degradation of the polymer more effectively than shorter chains slip freely along each other (only by other methods of analysis. For example, the vender wall forces operating). In more complex nature of complex condensation polymers, such as systems bearing a large number of polar cured phenolic resins or hetro aromatic polymers substituent or in very high molecular weight is best understood via studies of their photo materials, the attractive forces between chains may behaviour. become so large that the bonds in the polymer The greatest single factor explaining the properties chain break, causing complex chemical processes of polymers is molecular weight. Numerous tests to completely change the structure of the polymer have been known for a long time to depend on at the site of bond rupture, thereby changing the the degree of polymerization or the average overall measured properties of the substance. molecular weight. For example, tensile strength, Examples of such changes for often found in elongation, impact strength, and flexural strength curing or in extended polymerization of all indicate that at low degrees of polymerization condensation are taking place simultaneously little or no strength is observed. within the polymer body. Obvious changes in the However, at some point in the length of the macroscopic morphology of these systems have polymer chain, changes in mechanical properties been observed and related to the macroscopic are no longer observed. As the chain length is changes in the bulk polymer. Systematic studies of shortened, for example, by direct polymer degradation, which started about 50 years depolymerization, the mechanical properties will ago, were originally confirmed to thermal eventually reach a point where successively degradation and were seriously limited in scope by decreasing mechanical properties will be observed. problems of chemical analysis. Manufacturers From the view point of the synthetic chemist, preferred to solve their problems of polymer attainment of high molecular weight materials is of instability by the use of stabilizers discovered by paramount importance in any initial investigation. trial and error methods, rather than through an Once achieved, more detailed structure understanding of the mechanism of the investigation can be undertaken, such as degradation process. The area of research on distribution studies of molecular weight, polymer degradation was further extended as branching and cross-linking, stereo chemical synthetic materials of increasing chemical regularity, and the reactivity of the functional complexity began to be synthesized. These are the groups present in the polymer. On the other hand, products of a continuing search for materials a look at the stability of the polymer reveals the which are more resistant to the many degradative reverse process of polymerization from a agencies to which synthetic polymers are exposed molecular weight and strength correlation. If, for in their commercial applications agencies such as example, the polymer degrades via direct light, oxygen, ozone, high energy radiation, depolymerization to monomer, such as mechanical stress, moisture, atmospheric encountered in the photo degradation in vacuo of pollutants of industrial origin and the various certain polymers , a rough reversal of the strength combinations of these. While, in the past, the molecular weight correlation might be expected. ultimate purpose of degradation studies has been At elevated temperatures, addition polymers such to assist in the formulation of more stable as vinyl polymers and polymers derived from materials.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

The aromatic polysulfones (APS) plastics were breakers, electronics hardware, autoclave first offered in 1965 as an extrusion and injection equipment and wiring devices. moulding material for high temperature and minimum creep applications. Aromatic polysulfones (APS) is one of the outstanding thermoplastics for use as a load-bearing, structural material for long term use at temperature upto 3000 F. Aromatic polysulfones are resistant to mineral acids, alkalies and salt solutions. Under moderate stress at elevated temperature, these are resistant to most detergents, oils and alcohols. It is damaged by ketones, and chlorinated and aromatic hydrocarbons as well. Its desirable electrical properties are comparable with poly-carbonate, and its arc resistance is better than that of many thermosetting compounds. It is self-extinguishing and contains no stabilizers or plasticizers. It is stable in its natural transparent resin form. Aromatic polysulfones plastics are available in colors, as well. Its wide molding temperature latitude, 600 to 7500 F enhances its mold ability and, since it does not degrade by continuous recycling, all the scrap can be used, without stress-cracking or subsequent crazing. Aromatic polysulfones are competitive with many basic thermosetting compounds, since it includes some of the useful properties that heretofore have been present only in thermosets it also possesses the important advantage of low cost injection molding. Among the aromatic polysulfones, the poly (either-sulfones) derived from dihydric phenols and 4,4'-dichlorodiphenyl sulfones have achieved commercial application that member of this class based on 2,2- bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) propane (bisphenol-A) (Bakelite polysulfone, Union Carbide Corporation) will be used as a typical example. The various grades of this polysulfone are clear, rigid, tough thermoplastics with glass transition temperatures of 180-2500 C. its formula is given by structure Where n, has values between 50-80. Chain rigidity is derived from the relatively inflexible and immobile phenyl and SO2 groups, and toughness from the connecting ether oxygen. These groupings also impart the excellent thermal stability and chemical inertness that characterize these resins. Those properties, along with the high glass transition temperatures, make possible continuous use at temperatures in the 150-2000 C range. Good thermal stability allows the usual range of thermoplastic processing operations in spite of the melting temperatures encountered. Applications particularly suited for these polysulfones include both molded objects and extrusions for which good thermal stability and good electrical properties are required. Applications include hot water pipes, under-hood automobile components, lenses, connectors, appliance housing, iron handles, dishwasher impellers, switches, circuit

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014

THE CONTRACTUAL CONCEPT OF WARRANTY

Dr. Santosh Kumar Singh Associate Professor, Department of Law Tilak Dhari P.G. Law College Pili Kothi, Jaunpur

There is no more troublesome word in the law my warranty I can avail myself of the condition than the word ‘warranty’ like all other words, the annexed to it. You can waive the condition and term ‘warranty’ is used in a variety of senses. The take delivery, and in that case my warranty presence of the word “collateral” in the definition becomes absolute and I must compensate you. of warranty is undesirable because of totally Proper Meaning and Definition of Warranty changed modern modes of marketing the goods. In its ordinary meaning, the word ‘warranty’ These days, manufacturers advertise their products denotes a binding promise. Everyone knows what for sale and the sellers give guarantee for their a person means when he says "I guarantee it" or "I goods without any demands from the buyers, warrant it“ or “I give you my word on it” - unlike sales in good old days. These guarantees meaning in all cases that he binds himself to it. form the integral part of the bargain. There is This is the meaning it has borne in English Law nothing “collateral” in such guarantees. The for more than 300 years from the leading case of present paper is devoted to consider the term Chandelor Vs. Loups onwards. However, during ‘warranty' with the help of dictionaries, judicial the last fifty years, the words has been used in dictum and different writer. another sense. It denotes a subsidiary term in The Preliminary meaning of Warranty contract a distinction from a vital from known as a The term “warranty” seems to have been ‘condition’. In this context, it is to be understood imported into law of contract from the old law of as a term of the contract the breach of which gives conveyancing where it signified an express or rise simply to a claim of damages, in contrast to a implied covenant by the grantor of real state to ‘condition’ whose breach entitled the injured party indemnity by the grantee if he should be evicted. not only to claim damages but also to repudiate Its meaning was considerably widened in the law the contract if he so desires. Unfortunately, there of contract, and before the Act was passed it was a seems to be no definite meaning of the word term of very uncertain signification. It was collateral as used here. By this is meant that it sometimes used as strictly equivalent to “condition relates to the subject matter of another promise precedent”, yet sometimes it was sought to made by the warrantor and exists, side by side contract it with "condition precedent", or rather with that promise, in a single contract. Suppose an with a certain kind of condition precedent, namely agreement is entered into between A and B a . promissory condition precedent. When in the whereby A promise to sell a horse to B and latter sense the distinction between “condition” warrants that it is sound . The warranty of and “warranty” correspond with the distinction soundness is subordinate to A’s promise to sell the drawn by the other older cases between what were horse in the sense that it is only made because of Known as “dependent” and “independent” that promise. In normal circumstances it would be covenants or promise. pointless for A to give B a warranty of the A warranty is a promise to compensate the soundness of his horse unless A also transferred promise in money for the harm, he suffers by the the property in the horse to B. happening of a specified event. Its essence is The term “warranty” was used to denote any insurance against the risk of the event happening. auxiliary stipulation to a contract of sale, and in But for the warranty the promise may bad himself particular a stipulation relating to the title to, or to bear the risk : the warranty makes it clear that the quality, condition, or fitness of goods the risk is borne by the promisor. contracted to be sold. In this sense of the term a A warranty is generally a collateral term of a breach of warranty might give rise either to a mere contract. By this it is not meant that the warranty claims for damages, or to a right to reject goods is in any way a subsidiary or less important term of and treat the contract as repudiated, according as the contract but namely this : the risk assumed is goods might have been accepted or not. one connected with the subject matter of another Varying meaning of Warranty promise made by the warrantor, as where A sells a Warranty is a term that is used in various horse and warrants that it is sound. connections to cover many different meanings. A warranty, like any promise, may itself be subject Even in connection with the law of sales of goods to a condition, e.g., I warrant that a horse I sell sharply divergent meaning have been attached to you will live for a year provided it is not used for it. Thus the English Sale of Goods Act, sec. 62 hunting. The condition may be that you shall provides as follows : “Warranty” as regard waive a condition annexed to your promise. Thus, England, means an agreement with reference to I warranty the horse I sell you is sound provided goods which are the subject of a contract of sale, you take delivery and pay the price, you promise but collateral to the main purpose of such to take delivery and pay the price provided the contract, the breach of which gives rise to a claim horse is sound. If the horse is unsound you may for damages, but not to a right to reject the goods avail yourself of the condition annexed to your and treat the contract as repudiated. As regards promise : but in that case you cannot sue me on Scotland, a breach of warranty shall be deemed to

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 be a failure to perform a material part of the of specific goods and not an integral part contract.” of the description of the goods. These provisions of the English Sale of Goods  A warranty may be “collateral” in the Act, it will be noticed, are entirely out of accord sense that it is less important whereas with the American Uniform Sales Act, sec. 11, 12, condition is more important. 15 and 69. Much of the confusion that besets the “A “warranty” is implied when the law derives it discussion of seller’s warranties in Sales of Goods, by implication or inference from the nature of the even under the American authorities, is transaction. No particular form words is necessary attributable to varying shades of meaning attached to create a warranty. It is the subject matter of a to the term. Benjamin says : "Warranty is often statement and the circumstances under which it is thought of and described as some sort of collateral made that are considered than form. A warranty is promise relating to the goods sold”. It should be not valid unless supported a consideration. In case clearly recognized, however, that the term is of a breach of warranty the may sue for the broader than promise. The warranty obligation is purchase price or may claim damages, and is not mot necessarily even contractual in its nature. bound to return the goods “Implied warranties do not rest upon any “Generally, “warranty” denotes a term collateral to supposed agreement in fact. They are obligation the purpose of the contract, breach of which which the law raises principles bargain to the justifies a claim of damages but does not justify actual contract, principles are held liable for fraud. treating the contract as repudiated.” It is for the sake of convenience, merely, that this It defines warranty a term of a contract collateral obligation its permitted to to be enforced under to the main purpose of the contract, any the form of contract.” agreement either accompanying a transfer of There is no more troublesome word in the law property or collateral to the contract for such than the word “Warranty”. It is constantly used in transfer or to any other agreement or transaction. different sense. The presence of the word “Warranty a guarantee or security that foods are of “collateral” in the definition of Warranty is the quality stated. A promise or covenant by deed undesirable because of totally changed modern by the bargainer, for himself and his heirs, to modes of marketing the goods. Apart from this warrant or secure the bargainee and his heirs Samuel J. Stoljar points out that the term against men for the enjoying of the thing “collateral” is used and understood in the guaranteed. following different sense which brings unusual “Warranty is a provisin which is subsidiary or uncertainly in its meaning : collateral to main purpose of the contract.”  A warranty is treated as “collateral in the Nature of Warranty sense that it may operate as an exception The true nature of a ‘warranty’ has been explained to the parol evidence rule and may, by Lord Abinger, C.B. in the following words : therefore be given in those cases where “A warranty is an express or implied statement of the agreement is in writing. something which the party undertakes shall be  The word “collateral” may mean ancillary, part of the contract; and though part of the secondary or dependent, where as it may contract yet collateral to the express object of it or appear to be an independent promise. as per Lord Haldane observes: “The proper  A warranty may be “collateral” from the significance of the word in the law of England is point of view of simple form. A asks B to an agreement which refers to the subject matter of sell his watch. B says, “I will purchase it, a contract, but not being an essential part of the but is it alright”? A says, guarantly that it contract either intrinsically or by agreement, is is in excellent condition”. This is collateral to the main purpose of such a contract.” “collateral” in form. The nature of a ‘warranty’, as compared  Warranty may be “collateral” in the sense with a condition’, is best illustrated by the case of that it entitles the plaintiff, for its Bettini Vs. Gye.” Bettini, an opera singer breaches, only damages and does not entered into a written contract with Gye. the entitle him to repudiate contract. director of the Royal Italian opera in London, whereby he agreed to sing in concerts and operas  A warranty may be “collateral” from the in the U.K. from 30th March, 1875 to 13th July, point of view of the pleading, that is, the 1675 and “to be in London without fail at least six buyer being sued by seller, can plead for days before the commencement of his its breach by the seller. The seller is not engagement for the purpose of his rehearsals.” He bound to state affirmatively that he has was prevented by illness from arriving in London committed any breach thereof. before 28th March, but he did arrive on that day  A warranty may be “collateral” in the and thereafter was ready and willing to perform sense that it is one of the agreed his agreement. Gye declined to accept his services exceptions to the general rule of caveat and repudiated the contract. Upon this, Bettini emptor. sued for the breach.  A warranty is “collateral” in the sense that The case was heard by the queen's Bench Division it is auxiliary to the “main purpose” of the (Black burn, Quain and Archibald, JJ.). The Court sale. held that the term as to the presence for rehearsal  It may be “collateral” in the sense that it was a ‘warranty’ not justifying repudiation. It was contains special agreement relating to sale observed that the defendant might claim compensation for any loss he had incurred

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014 because plaintiff's absence during rehearsal but he 6. Ibid. could not lawfully treat the contract as at end. The 7. Cr. Jac. 4. (1603) court pointed out that if the engagement had been 8. Supra note 11 at p. 296. only to sing in operas, or if it had been only for a 9. Lawrence vold, “On Sales” (2nd ed.) few performances, the term as to rehearsals might 1959, p. 425. well have been vital to the contract. But the 10. Wilson C.J., in Bekkevold Vs. Potts, attending circumstances of the case make it clear (1927), 173 Minn. 87, 216 N.W. 790, 791. that it not a condition but merely a warranty. 11. Seldom, J. in Hoe Vs. Sanborn, (1860), 21 Nature of the Obligation of Warranty : N.Y. 552 to 569. Much of the intrinsic difficulty and still more of 12. Stoljar, “Condition and Warranties and the divergence of authority which characterize the Descriptions of Quality in Sale of Goods law of warranty are due to an imperfect - I” (1952) Vol. 15 Mod. L.R. p. 430. recognition of the nature of the obligation 13. The Encylopaedia Americana Vol. 28, p. 707. imposed by a warranty. The action upon a 14. David M. Walker, The Oxford warranty was in its origin a pure action of tort. Companion Law Dictionary (1980) p. There is no doubt that today the obligation of a 1290 to 1291. warrantor is generally conceived of as contractual, 15. The Dictionary of English Law, p. 1854. and there can be no doubt also that a seller may 16. P. Ramanatha Aiyer, The Law Lexicon of expressly promise to be answerable for some British India p. 1331. alleged quality of the article sold, or that if he 17. Mitra’s Legal and Commercial Dictionary makes such a promise for good consideration he 5th ed. p. 799. enters into a contract. This, however, does not 18. Dawsons Ltd. Vs. Bonnin (1922) 2 A.C. either upon authority or reason exhaust the 413, p. 422. possibilities of express Warranties. It should not 19. Q.B.D. 183. (1876) 1 be the law and by the weight of modern authority, 20. Ibid. it is not the law that a seller who by positive 21. Williston on Sales Sec. 1-257, p. 507. affirmation induces a buyer to enter into a bargain 22. Sippen Vs. Boven, 122, US 575, 7 Sct. can escape that his affirmation was not an offer to 1283. contract. As an actual agreement to contract is not essential, the obligation of the seller in such a case is one imposed by law as distinguished from one voluntarily assumed. It may Be called an obligation either on a Quasi - contract or a Quasi tort, because remedies appropriate to contract and also to tort have been applicable. That this character of the seller’s obligation was recognised by Blackstone, : Blackstone places his treatment of warranty under the head of contracts “which are such as reason and justice dictate, which therefore the law presumes that every man has contracted to perform; and upon this presumption, makes him 39 answerable to such person as suffer by his non- performance.” Blackstone includes warranties : “Also, if he that selleth any thing both upon the sale warrant it to be good, the law annexes a facit contract to this warranty, that if it be not so, he shall make compensation to the buyer; else it is an injury to good faith, for which an action on the case will lie to recover damages, and that this point of view has been lost sight of by many courts is no doubt due to the fact that assumpsit became so generally the remedy for the enforcement of a warranty. But even recently an action of tort for warranty has been held distinguished court to lie irrespective of any fraud on the part of the seller or knowledge on his part that the representations constituting me warranty were untrue. REFERENCES 1. Montrose, J.L., "Conditions, warranties, and other contractual terms" (1937) Vol. 15. Can B.R. p. 295. 2. Ibid. 3. Supra note 1 at p. 295. 4. Ibid. 5. Supra note 1 at p. 327.

International Journal of Professional Development ISSN: 2277-517X (Print), 2279-0659 (Online) Vol.3,No.2,July-Dec. 2014